WO2004098525A9 - Uses of ion channel modulating compounds - Google Patents

Uses of ion channel modulating compounds

Info

Publication number
WO2004098525A9
WO2004098525A9 PCT/US2004/013731 US2004013731W WO2004098525A9 WO 2004098525 A9 WO2004098525 A9 WO 2004098525A9 US 2004013731 W US2004013731 W US 2004013731W WO 2004098525 A9 WO2004098525 A9 WO 2004098525A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ion channel
channel modulating
ofthe
hydrogen
modulating compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/013731
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2004098525A3 (en
WO2004098525A2 (en
Inventor
Gregory N Beatch
Alan Ezrin
Original Assignee
Cardiome Pharma Corp
Gregory N Beatch
Alan Ezrin
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cardiome Pharma Corp, Gregory N Beatch, Alan Ezrin filed Critical Cardiome Pharma Corp
Priority to CA002524034A priority Critical patent/CA2524034A1/en
Publication of WO2004098525A2 publication Critical patent/WO2004098525A2/en
Publication of WO2004098525A9 publication Critical patent/WO2004098525A9/en
Publication of WO2004098525A3 publication Critical patent/WO2004098525A3/en
Priority to US11/832,580 priority patent/US20080063707A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/455—Nicotinic acids, e.g. niacin; Derivatives thereof, e.g. esters, amides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/4965—Non-condensed pyrazines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/06—Antiarrhythmics
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D207/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/12—Oxygen or sulfur atoms

Definitions

  • the methods and formulations described in this patent relate to the use of ion channel modulating compounds to treat or prevent arrhythmia and other diseases. Specific plasma level concentrations, dosage levels and other characterizations of ion channel modulating compounds used to treat or prevent arrhythmia and other diseases, and in particular atrial fibrillation, are described.
  • Atrial flutter and atrial fibrillation are the most commonly sustained cardiac arrhythmias in clinical practice. In this patent we refer to atrial fibrillation as either "atrial fibrillation” or "AF.” Currently, the development or exacerbation of AF often prompts emergency department (ED) presentations. The incidence of arrhythmias increases with age, and with the aging population in developed countries, the prevalence is expected to rise substantially over the next several decades.
  • Atrial fibrillation there are a variety of management strategies for acute atrial fibrillation and the outcomes are generally good; however, catastrophic events can occur as a result of atrial fibrillation such as congestive heart failure, thrombo-embolic phenomenon (particularly strokes), and serious adverse effects associated with treatment.
  • arrhytmias such as atrial fibrillation
  • atrial fibrillation Treatment of arrhytmias such as atrial fibrillation is complex and aspects of care, especially the decision to control the ventricular rate vs. convert the arrhythmia, remain controversial. Conversion of atrial fibrillation to sinus rhythm is often attempted in the acute setting to improve symptoms and to prevent the detrimental hemodynamic effects that atrial fibrillation may have in some patients (e.g., valvular disease or left ventricular dysfunction). Early conversion of atrial fibrillation may also prevent the development of electrical remodeling and the embolic risks associated with intra-atrial thrombus formation. Electrical cardioversion is effective in restoring sinus rhythm but requires procedural sedation or anesthesia and is not successful in all cases.
  • Described in this patent are methods, formulations, dosing regimes, and routes of administration for the treatment or prevention of various diseases or conditions, including arrhythmias, and particularly the treatment or prevention of atrial fibrillation.
  • the disease or condition is treated or prevented by administering one or more ion channel modulating compounds to a subject, where the ion channel modulating compound or compounds produce specific plasma levels in the subject.
  • methods for providing specified plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds in a subject are described in detail in the Detailed Description section. In one version ofthe methods, the subject is a human subject.
  • the formulation is an intravenous formulation.
  • the formulation is an oral formulation.
  • the formulations may include one or more ion channel modulating compounds together with other optional components.
  • the formulations may be administered in a variety of dosing regimes, including administering one or more formulations that may or may not be administered via the same route of administration.
  • the formulations may also be delivered by repeat dosing and by substantially continuous dosing.
  • the plasma levels may be characterized using a variety of characterizations, including (1) that the characterization that the concentration is above some concentration level for some amount of time, (2) that the Cmax ofthe concentration profile is above some specified level or in some range of levels, (3) that the mean trough value is below some specified level or is in a range of levels, and (4) that the steady state value is below some specified level or is in a range of levels.
  • Examples of blood plasma level concentration profiles that may be produced using the methods described in this patent include those in which the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds (1) is greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for at least some time; (2) has a C max of greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml; (3) has a C max of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (4) has a C ma ⁇ of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 15 ⁇ g/ml; (5) is greater that about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; (6) is greater that about 1.0 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours; (7) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (8) has a steady state concentration of less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (9) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (10) has
  • the ion channel modulating compound or compounds are administered to the subject to produce a total ion channel modulating compound concentration that (1) is greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for at least some time; (2) has a C max of greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml; (3) has a C max of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 20 ⁇ g ml; (4) has a C ma of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 15 ⁇ g/ml; (5) is greater that about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; or (6) is greater that about 1.0 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours.
  • the total ion channel modulating compound concentration may possess one or more of these characterizations.
  • the ion channel modulating compound or compounds are administered to the subject to produce a total ion channel modulating compound concentration that (1) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (2) has a steady state concentration of less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (3) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (4) has a steady state concentration of less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (5) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (6) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (7) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 3 ⁇ g/ml; (8) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 3 ⁇ g/ml;
  • ion channel modulating compounds that may be used in the methods provided in this patent are described in detail in the Detailed Description section.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be a compound of formula
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a cycloalkylamine ether compound of formula
  • n 1,2,3, or 4 and the other substituents are as defined in the Detailed Description
  • Figure 1 illustrates a reaction sequence whereby certain aminocyclohexyl ether compounds ofthe present invention may be synthesized.
  • Figure 2 shows the cumulative percentage of dissolution of an intermediate release form ofthe ion channel modulating compound (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride over time.
  • Figure 3 shows a comparison ofthe cumulative percentage of dissolution of different controlled release formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride over time.
  • Figure 4 shows the cumulative percentage of patients terminating atrial fibrillation (AF) after infusions of placebo, 0.5 and 1 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride or 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg (1R 3 2R)- 2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, in patients with recent onset atrial fibrillation.
  • IR, 2R -2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride or 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg (1R 3 2R)- 2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane mono
  • Figure 5 shows the plasma concentrations of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after infusion in patients dosed at 2 mg/kg i.v. (filled inverted triangles) and those additionally dosed at 3 mg/kg i.v. (filled circles).
  • Figure 6 shows (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxvpyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma concentrations at various times after IV (10-min infusion) or oral drug administration (solution in orange juice) to normal volunteers (dose 5 mg/kg).
  • Figure 7 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Oral Gavage Administration in Beagle Dogs.
  • Figure 8 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Intraduodenal Administration in Beagle Dogs.
  • Figure 9 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Intracolonic Administration in Beagle Dogs.
  • Figure 11 shows dose normalized AUCs of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for each route of administration in beagle dogs.
  • Figure 12 shows the plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after a single oral dose in six dog subjects.
  • Figure 13 shows the plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after a single oral dose in six dog subjects following seven days of repeated (4x daily) dosing ofthe drug.
  • Figure 14 shows the trough (Cmin) plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for six dog subjects given repeated daily dosing ofthe drug.
  • Figure 15 shows a simulation ofthe pharmacokinetics of a 100 mg oral dose.
  • Figure 16 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of 100 mg given orally every two hours.
  • Figure 17 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a loading dose of 500 mg followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every two hours.
  • Figure 18 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a loading dose of 150 mg followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every two hours.
  • Figure 19 shows a simulation of a single oral dose of an immediate release drug formulation, four controlled release formulations: a hydrophilic drug formulaion, a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation, a hydrophobic drug formulation, and a hot-melt wax drug formulation.
  • Figure 20 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation given orally every eight hours.
  • Figure 21 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime in which a loading dose of a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation is followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every eight hours.
  • Described in this patent are methods, formulations and routes of administration for achieving a blood plasma level of an ion channel modulating compound in a subject. Also described in this patent are methods, formulations and routes of administration for treating a subject suffering from arrhythmia by achieving a blood plasma level. Also described are methods, formulations, and routes of administration for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a subject by achieving a blood plasma level.
  • Atrial fibrillation is one type of arrhythmia specificially referred to throughout this description.
  • the methods, formulations and routes of administration described herein are not limited to atrial fibrillation, and may be used to treat, prevent and/or postpone the onset of any arrhythmia, including but not limited to: ventricular arrhythmias (e.g., ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, premature ventricular contractions), supraventricular arrhythmias (e.g., supraventricular tachycardia, atrial fibrillation, Wolff- Parkinson- White Syndrome, atrial flutter, premature supraventricular contractions), heart block, Long Q-T Syndrome, and sick sinus syndrome.
  • ventricular arrhythmias e.g., ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, premature ventricular contractions
  • supraventricular arrhythmias e.g., supraventricular tachycardia, atrial fibrillation, Wolff- Parkinson- White Syndrome, atrial flutter, premature supra
  • the subject in which arrhythmia or other diseases may be treated or prevented is any mammal.
  • the subject is a human subject.
  • the subject is any domestic animal, including but not limited to dogs, and cats.
  • the subject is any livestock animal, including but not limited to pigs, horses, cows and sheep.
  • the subject is any zoo animal, including but not limited to: Bengel tigers, camels and giraffes.
  • arrhythmia e.g. atrial fibrillation
  • formulations and routes of administration methods for treating arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) and formulations and routes of administration that may be used in these methods.
  • methods for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia and formulations and routes of administration that may be used in these methods.
  • useful plasma levels and other diseases that it is believed may be treated using these plasma levels.
  • a subject suffering from arrhythmia including but not limited to atrial fibrillation, is treated by administering to the subject a formulation containing one or more ion channel modulating compounds.
  • the formulation may optionally contain one or more additional components.
  • treatment is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including and preferably clinical results.
  • treatment preferably means termination of arrhythmia.
  • Treatment may also mean a return to normal sinus rhytlim for the subject suffering from arrhythmia.
  • Treatment may also mean a lessening ofthe severity ofthe arrhythmia. Treatement may include the use ofthe methods, formulations and routes of administration described herein in conjunction with other therapies, for example, electrical cardioversion.
  • the arrhythmia treated is atrial fibrillation.
  • the subject in which arrhythmia may be treated is any mammal.
  • the subject is a human subject.
  • the subject is a domestic animal, including but not limited to dogs and cats; or a farm animal, including but not limited to...
  • any ion channel modulating compound capable of treating arrhythmia may be used in the methods and formulations described in this section.
  • Specific ion channel modulating compounds that may be used are described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent, and generally any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in that section may be used.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
  • the formulation used for treating arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) in the methods described in this patent can be a pure ion channel modulating compound, a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds, a pure ion channel modulating compound formulated with one or more additional components, or a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds formulated with one or more additional components.
  • the ion channel modulating compound or compounds may generally be any ofthe compounds as described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent.
  • any formulation, route of administration, and dosage form capable of being used in the methods for treating arrhythmia described in this patent may be used.
  • the formulation is an oral dosage formulation or an intravenous dosage formulation.
  • An example of a formulation that may be used for treating arrhythmia is an intra-venous formulation of one or more ion channel modulating compound in a pharmaceutically acceptable solution.
  • the one or more ion channel modulating compound may generally be any ion channel modulating compound described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent.
  • ion channel modulating compound that maybe used is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
  • a formulation that may be used to treat arrhythmia by intravenous administration is a 20 mg/ml (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride isotonic intravenous solution in 40 mM sodium Citrate, pH 5.5.
  • Other preferred formulations include immediate (fast or "flash”) release oral, sublingual, nasal, and inhaled formulations.
  • the formulation used for treatment of arrhythmia will contain an amount ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds such that administration of a dose ofthe formulation containing a therapeutically effective amount of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds will treat the arrhythmia in the subject.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount" ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds is that amount sufficient to effect the desired treatment of arrhythmia in the subject to which the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are administered.
  • the formulation containing the therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be administered in repeated doses.
  • each individual does may or may not deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds but the cumulative effect ofthe repeated doses will deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds to the subject.
  • the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
  • “mg/kg” means the amount of ion channel modulating compound or compounds per kg body weight of the subject.
  • the administered dose contains 5mg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the formulation is delivered by repeat dosing where a first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and a second dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds. These first two doses may optionally be followed by one or more subsequent doses.
  • the first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and 5.0 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds; or the first dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the time between repeated dosing may generally be any time such that the repeated dosing delivers a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the time between repeated doses may be between about 5 minutes and about 1 hour, or in another version between about 15 minutes and about 45 minutes.
  • repeated doses of between about 0.01 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg are delivered per hour for up to 36 hours.
  • repeated doses do not have to be administered via the same route of administration. For example, a first dose may be administered intravenously followed by a second dose administered orally.
  • a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by administering more than one formulation at the same time.
  • a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by simultaneous or near simultaneous administration of both oral and intravenous formulations.
  • the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds present in the subject blood plasma after administration will be at a level sufficient to effect the required treatment ofthe subject's arrhythmia.
  • the blood plasma level is the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds in the blood plasma ofthe subject.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a C max of at least 0.1 ⁇ g/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses ofthe formulation.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a C max of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 20 ⁇ g/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses. In one version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a C max of between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 15 ⁇ g/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses.
  • the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 1 ⁇ g/ml for a time of about 2 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose of formulation.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for a time of about 10 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose ofthe formulation.
  • these blood plasma levels are maintained by administering two or more repeated doses ofthe specific intravenous formulation described above in this section.
  • a formulation containing one or more ion channel modulating compounds is administered to a subject to prevent or postpone onset of arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) in the subject.
  • arrhythmia e.g. atrial fibrillation
  • Prevention and postponement of onset include prevention and postponement of onset of recurrence of arrhythmia; that is, the prevention or postponent of onset of arrhythmia in a subject that has previously undergone one or more arrhythmias.
  • the formulation may optionally contain one or more additional components.
  • prevention and similar word such as “prevented,” “preventing” etc, is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including and preferably clinical results.
  • prevention preferably means stopping the occurrence of arrhythmia. Prevention may also include not only an absolute stopping ofthe occurrence of arrhythmia but may also include a lessening ofthe severity of arrhythmia if it does occur. The methods described in this section may also be used to postpone the time for onset of arrhythmia if it does occur. The methods described in this section may also be used to lessen the probability that the subject will suffer from arrhythmia.
  • the arrhythmia to be prevented is atrial fibrillation.
  • the subject in which arrhythmia may be prevented or for which onset may be postponed is any mammal.
  • the subject is a human subject.
  • the subject is any domesic animal, including, but not limited to cats, dogs, etc.
  • the subject is any farm animal, inlcluding, but not limited to pigs, cows, horses, etc..
  • any ion channel modulating compound capable of preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia may be used in the methods and formulations described in this section.
  • Specific ion channel modulating compounds that may be used are described in the Ion Channel Modulating section of this patent, and generally any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in that section may be used.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
  • the formulation used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia in the methods described in this patent can be a pure ion channel modulating compound, a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds, a pure ion channel modulating compound formulated with one or more additional components, or a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds formulated with one or more additional components.
  • the ion channel modulating compound or compounds may generally be any ofthe compounds as described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent.
  • any formulation, route of administration, and dosage form capable of being used in the methods for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia described in this patent maybe used.
  • General formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that maybe used are described in the Formulations, Routes of Administration, and Dosage Forms section in the patent.
  • Specific nonlimiting examples of formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia using the methods described in this patent are described in more detail below in this section.
  • the formulation is an oral dosage formulation.
  • An example of a formulation that may be used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia is an oral dosage formulation of one or more ion channel modulating compound.
  • the oral dosage formulation may be a solid formulation or may be a liquid formulation.
  • the one or more ion channel modulating compound may generally be any ion channel modulating compound described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent.
  • a specific example of an ion channel modulating compound that may be used is (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
  • a formulation that may be used to prevent or postpone onset arrhythmia by oral administration is a controlled release (CR) formulation, described below.
  • the formulation used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia will contain an amount ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds such that administration of a dose ofthe formulation containing a therapeutically effective amount of the ion channel modulating compo ⁇ nd or compounds will prevent or postpone onset ofthe arrhythmia in the subject.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount" ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds is that amount sufficient to effect the desired prevention or postponement of onset of arrhythmia in the subject to which the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are administered.
  • the formulation containing the therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be administered in repeated doses.
  • each individual does may or may not deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds but the cumulative effect ofthe repeated doses will deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
  • the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 50 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds to the subject. In another version, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 20 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. In another version, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 5.0 mg/kg and about 20 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
  • the formulation is delivered by repeat dosing where a first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds and a second dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. These first two doses may optionally be followed by one or more subsequent doses.
  • the first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and 5.0 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds; or the first dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 3 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
  • the time between repeated dosing may generally be any time such that the repeated dosing delivers a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the time between repeated doses may be between about 5 minutes and about seven days, or in another version between about 1 hour and about 24 hours. In one version, the time between repeated doses is between about 4 hours and about every seven days, or in another version between about 8 horus and 24 hours. In one version the time between doses is about 12 hours.
  • repeated doses do not have to be administered via the same route of administration. For example, a first dose may be administered orally followed by a second dose administered intravenously.
  • a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by administering more than one formulation at the same time. As a nonlimiting example, a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by simultaneous or near simultaneous administration of both oral and intravenous formulations.
  • the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds present in the subject blood plasma after administration will be at a level sufficient to effect the required prevention or postponement of onset ofthe subject's arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation).
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a C max of at least 50 ng/ml following administration of one or more doses ofthe formulation.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a C max of between about 50 ng/ml and about 50 ⁇ g/ml following administration of one or more doses.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration of one or more doses has a C max of between about 50 ng/ml and about 30 ⁇ g/ml; or between about 50 ng/ml and about 20 ⁇ g/ml; or between about 50 ng/ml and about 1 O ⁇ g/ml; or between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 3 ⁇ g/ml; or between about 1 O ⁇ g/ml and about 50 ⁇ g/ml; or between about 20 ⁇ g/ml and about 50 ⁇ g/ml; or between about 3 O ⁇ g/ml and about 50 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for a time of about 3 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose of formulation. In one nonlimiting example, these blood plasma levels are maintained by administering one or more repeated doses ofthe oral formulation described above in this section.
  • the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a mean trough value of between about 50 ng/ml and about 30 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mean trough value is between about 50 ng/ml and about 20 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mean trough value is between about 50 ng/ml and about 1 O ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mean trough value is between about 1 ng/ml to 10 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mean trough value is between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 3 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mean trough value is the average ofthe trough values for the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compounds during a course of dosing; where the trough value is the lowest concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma immediately before a subsequent dose ofthe ion channel modulating compound.
  • the mean trough value for the course of closing illustrated in Figure 18 is the average ofthe seven local minimum values ofthe blood plasma levels immediately preceeding doses two through eight ofthe ion channel modulating compounds.
  • the methods of treatment or methods of prevention it may be possible to provide blood plasma levels by a continuous or substantially continuous delivery ofthe ion channel modulating compounds.
  • the characterization ofthe total concentration of ion channels modulating compounds by the mean trough levels is ambiguous since there are not a discrete number of doses with concomitant trough levels immediately preceding each dose.
  • the continuous or substantially continuous delivery of ion channel modulating compound will provide, after some initial time, a steady state concentration of ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
  • the ranges of mean trough valves described for the multiple dosing regime is replaced by ranges for the steady state concentration.
  • the steady state concentration is less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is between 1 ng ml and 10 ⁇ g/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is between 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and 3 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the ion channel modulating compound or compounds that are administered to a subject have a rate of absorption that is substantially independent ofthe site or route of administration.
  • the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a subject orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the duodenum ofthe subject.
  • the rate of abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a subject orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the colon ofthe subject.
  • the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog is substantially independent ofthe site or route of administration. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the duodenum ofthe dog. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the colon ofthe dog.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is substantially independent ofthe route of administration.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following oral administration to the subject is substantially equivalent to the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration to the subject's colon.
  • the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following oral administration to the subject is substantially equivalent to the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration to the subject's duodenum.
  • the subject is a dog.
  • the rate of abso ⁇ tion of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be measured by the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds over time. In one version, the rate of abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is measured by the area under the curve (AOC) ofthe blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds over time. In one version, the rate of abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is measured by the peak blood plasma level (C max ) of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the time after administration that the peak blood plasma level occurs (T ma3C ).
  • AOC area under the curve
  • the rate of abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is measured by the peak blood plasma level (C max ) of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the time after administration that the peak blood plasma level occurs (T ma3C ).
  • a second rate of abso ⁇ tion is substantially equivalent to a first rate of abso ⁇ tion if the value ofthe second rate of abso ⁇ tion is within about twenty percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of abso ⁇ tion, or within about ten percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of abso ⁇ tion, or within about five percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of abso ⁇ tion.
  • a second blood plasma level is substantially equivalent to a first blood plasma level if the value ofthe second blood plasma level is within about twenty percent ofthe value ofthe first blood plasma level, or within about ten percent ofthe value of the first blood plasma level, or within about five percent ofthe value ofthe first blood plasma level.
  • the blood plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds may be used to treat or prevent arrythmias including atrial fibrillation.
  • the blood plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds may be used to treat or prevent other diseases. Examples of diseases which it is believed may be teated are described in this section.
  • Useful blood plasma levels in a subject of ion channel modulating compounds in a subject include: (l)greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for at least some time; (2)C max greater than about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml; (3)C max between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (4)C max between about 0.3 ⁇ g/ml and about 15 ⁇ g/ml; (5)greater that about 0.1 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; (6)greater that about 1.0 ⁇ g/ml for a period of time at least about 2 hours; (7)mean trough less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (8)steady state concentration less than about 20 ⁇ g/ml; (9)mean trough less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (l ⁇ )steady state concentration less than about 10 ⁇ g/ml; (1 l)mean trough concentration between about 1 ng/ml and about
  • the above blood plasma levels are useful when provided in a human subject.
  • the above blood plasma levels are also useful when provided in a dog or pig subject. It is believed that the above blood plasma levels may also be useful when produced in other subjects such as those described elsewhere in this patent.
  • the blood plasma levels described in this section may be produced in a subject by administering to the subject one or more channel modulating compounds in an amount sufficient to produce the blood plasma levels described.
  • any formulations, routes of administration, and closing regimes capable of producing the blood plasma levels may be used.
  • General examples of formulations routes of administration and dosages that may be used are described in the Formulations, Routes of Administration and Dosage section.
  • Specific, nonlimiting formulations, routes of administration and dosage regimes that may be used to produce the blood plasma levels are described in the examples and in the method of treating and method of preventing sections above. With this information, together with their knowledge ofthe field, someone with knowledge of drug delievery technologies will be able to straightforwardly produce the described blood plasma levels in a subject.
  • the blood plasma levels described in this section may be used to treat or prevent arrythmias, including but not limited to atrial fibrillation.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds at the blood plasma levels described may also be used to treat or prevent other diseases including at least the following diseases and conditions: disease ofthe central nervous system (CNS disorders), Lou Gehrig's disease (Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis), Alzheimer, ATDS-related dementia, Multiple Sclerosis (MS), convulsion, seizures, epileptic spasms, depression, insomnia, anxiety, schizoplirenia, Parkinson's disease, trigeminal pain, phantom limb pain, back pain, smoke cessation, respiratory disorders, cystic fibrosis, asthma, cough, inflammation and inflammatory disorders, irritable bowel disorders, irritable bowel syndrome Crohn's disease, prostatic hype ⁇ lasia, insect bites, psoriasis, arthritis, allergies, gastrointestinal disorders, urinary incontinence, cardio-vascular disorders, arrhythmia, heart failure, hypotension, cerebral or myocardial ischemias, hypertension, long-QT syndrome, stroke, migraine, ophthalmic diseases, diabetes me
  • the methods and formulations described herein may be used for at least the following treatments: antitoxin, anti-venom, antiviral, antibiotic, antiparasitic, antineoplastic, antinociceptive, sedative, anesthetic, analgesic, painkiller, painkiller, antipsychotic, local anaesthetic, topical anesthetic, antiangiogenic, cardioplegia, cardioprotectant.
  • the unique combination of activity with affect on the atria and devoid of or substantially devoid of similar effects on the ventricle leads to the development of an agent that may be used for the treatment and/or prevention of electrical rhythm disturbances in the atria without subsequent effects on the electrical activity in the ventricle.
  • the methods and ion channel modulating compounds described in this patent application are proposed for use in diseases and conditions including without limitation the management of atrial fibrillation, flutter and other supraventricular rhythm disturbance without adverse effects or substantial adverse effects on the electrical activity and rhythm of the ventricles.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases and conditions including without limitation a host of supraventicular rhythm disturbances whilst not affecting or substantially affecting the ventricles and being a safer agent for patients with impaired LV function and useful for managing rate and rhythm disturbances in acute MI and CHF.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions by modulating the late sodium current.
  • the late sodium current may also be referred to as the persistent sodium current.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose diseases or conditions in which the late sodium current is enhanced.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose diseases or conditions in which the late sodium current is enhanced in skeletal muscle.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose congenital myotonia.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent acute rhythm disturbances in the heart under pathological conditions (i.e. acute ischemia) in which normal electrophysiology ofthe heart is altered and under which I ⁇ r is of minimal importance and repolarization time course is dominated by I to and/or l kur .
  • acute rhythm disturbances in the heart resulting from slowing conduction e.g reentrant arrhythmia under acute ischemia or other disease state
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a composition effective to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose acute rhytlim disturbances in the heart under pathological conditions is given to a patient in need thereof.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders in the ischemic heart where such rhythm disturbances are mediated by prolonging refractoriness mediated by I ur and I t0 thusly prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders ofthe heart by inhibiting sodium currents of excitation and prolonging refractoriness mediated by I ur and Ito.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose rhythm disturbances by affecting abnormal conduction and prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disturbances by inhibiting sodium currents of excitation, inhibiting inward Na current associated with the plateau ofthe cardiac action potential (i.e.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose rhytlim disturbances by affecting abnormal conduction and prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders in patients in need thereof wherem the ion channel modulating compound is used in conjunction with devices (i.e. pacemakers or implantable defibrillators) to facilitate the patients response to the device to restore normal rhythm and that are used to manage patients with rhythm disturbances.
  • devices i.e. pacemakers or implantable defibrillators
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent the early return of atrial fibrillation following electrical cardioversion.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose the early return of atrial fibrillation following electrical cardioversion to improve the ease of cardioversion in patients requiring transthroacic or internal cardioversion to restore normal rhythm.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve atrial contractility and/or to treat and/or prevent blood stasis via electrical stunning following a cardiac procedure.
  • cardiac procedures include but are not limited to the maze procedure , surgery or cardiac bypasss, or any other procedure in which the atria are stunned precluding effective mechanical function leading to blood statsis, clotting, and potential of thromobosis.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to diagnose, treat and/or prevent electrical abnormalities ofthe heart in patients suffering from impaired electrical conduction ofthe heart.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to diagnose, treat and/or prevent contractile dysfunction and/or stunning ofthe atria.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to reduce thrombosis, cardiac and cerebral ischemia due to atrial dyskenesis and clot formation in patients suffering from impaired electrical and mechanical function ofthe heart.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or diagnose vasoconstriction.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasoconstriction in patients with reduced blood flow based upon inhibition of I t0 and I ur -
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasoconstriction by improving blood flood to selected organs and tissues.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasospasm.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve respiratory function based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of I t0 and I ur resulting in improvements in airway flow.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent smooth muscle spasm.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve renal function and urinary flow based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of I t0 and Ik ur resulting in improvements in urine flow.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve gall bladder function and bile flow based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of I t0 and I Ur .
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions which are mediated by inhibiting sodium currents and potassium currents.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions which are mediated by inliibiting sodium currents and potassium currents by inhibiting sodium channels and I ur and/or I to .
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve smooth muscle contractile function in body structures associated with physiological processes.
  • physiological processes include but are not limited to the passage of fluids and material through the body in the gut, urinary, respiratory or circulatory system for the reduction in blood pressure , intraocular pressure, humoral flow associated with glaucoma.
  • an ion ; channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of the blood.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions ofthe blood by modifying I k u r or I t0 .
  • diseases or conditions ofthe blood include but are not limited to sickle cell anemia and abnormal leukocyte or lymphochyte function (e.g. abnormal leukocyte or lymphochyte function associated with limiting an inflammation and/or immune response, particularly those mediated by changes in I ur or I t0 ).
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of low flow ischemia, shock and/or reperfusion injury.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of low flow ischemia, shock and or reperfusion injury by inhibiting sodium currents and potassium currents mediated by Ik ur and I t0 .
  • an ion channel modulating compound is provided as an enzyme modulator.
  • Enzyme that may be modulated may include but are not limited to lactate dehydrogenase (LDH); kinases such as map kinases and other kinases; transaminase; ATPase; xanthine oxidase; and Cytochrome oxidase.
  • LDH lactate dehydrogenase
  • kinases such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other kinases
  • transaminase such as map kinases and other
  • an ion channel modulating compound is provided as an anti-helminthic or vermifuge, i.e. de- worming medication for human or other mammals.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm. In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm in the normal heart. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm in the diseased heart. [00109] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool, hi one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool by modulating I t0 and Ik ur and I N3 .
  • an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool based on its association with the protein or molecules mediating I t0 and I ur and I Na .
  • an ion channel modulating compound is used as a ligand or affinity probe for proteins or molecules (i.e. ion channels).
  • an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to create antibodies.
  • an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify cellular or subcellular processes associated with cardiac function. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify receptor function and/or signal transduction. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify mechanisms associated with disease of the body (such as cardiac disorders).
  • Modulating Compounds and Exemplary Ion Channel Modulating Compounds all enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms ofthe ion channel modulating compounds are intended. Pure stereoisomers, mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers, and mixtures of different ion channel modulating compounds are described. Thus, the,ion channel modulating compounds may occur as racemates, racemic mixtures and as individual diastereomers, or enantiomers with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention. A racemate or racemic mixture does not imply a 50:50 mixture of stereoisomers.
  • Acid addition salts refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties ofthe free bases and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid and the like, or organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, malonic acid, succmic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, -toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid and the like.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid and the like
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, male
  • Alkanoyloxy refers to an ester substituent wherem the ether oxygen is the point of attachment to the molecule.
  • Alkoxy refers to an O-atom substituted by an alkyl group, for example, methoxy [-OCH 3 , a Cialkoxy ⁇ .
  • Alkoxyalkyl refers to a alkylene group substituted with an alkoxy group.
  • methoxyethyl [CH OCH CH 2 -] and ethoxymethyl (CH 3 CH 2 OCH 2 -] are both
  • Alkyl refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment containing the specified number of carbon atoms and having one point of attachment. Examples include
  • Alkylene refers to a divalent radical which is a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment containing the specified number of carbon atoms, and having two points of attachment.
  • An example is propylene [-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, a C 3 alkylene].
  • Alkylcarboxy refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment terminated by a carboxylic acid group [-COOH]. Examples include carboxymethyl
  • Aryl refers to aromatic groups which have at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes carbocyclic aryl, heterocyclic aryl (also known as heteroaryl groups) and biaryl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Carbocyclic aryl groups are generally preferred in the compounds ofthe present invention, where phenyl and naphthyl groups are preferred carbocyclic aryl groups.
  • Aralkyl refers to an alkylene group wherein one ofthe points of attachment is to an aryl group.
  • An example of an aralkyl group is the benzyl group [C 6 H5CH 2 -, a
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a ring, which may be saturated or unsaturated and monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic formed entirely from carbon atoms.
  • An example of a cycloalkyl group is the cyclopentenyl group (C 5 H 7 -), which is a five carbon (C 5 ) unsaturated cycloalkyl group.
  • Carbocyclic refers to a ring which may be either an aryl ring or a cycloalkyl ring, both as defined above.
  • Carbocyclic aryl refers to aromatic groups wherein the atoms which form the aromatic ring are carbon atoms. Carbocyclic aryl groups include monocyclic carbocyclic aryl groups such as phenyl, and bicyclic carbocyclic aryl groups such as naphthyl, all of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Heteroatom refers to a non-carbon atom, where boron, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are preferred heteroatoms, with nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur being particularly preferred heteroatoms in the compounds ofthe present invention.
  • Heteroaryl refers to aryl groups having from 1 to 9 carbon atoms and the remainder ofthe atoms are heteroatoms, and includes those heterocyclic systems described in
  • Suitable heteroaryls include furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazinyl, imidazolyl, and the like.
  • Hydroxyalkyl refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment bearing an hydroxy (-OH) group. Examples include hydroxyrnethyl (-CH 2 OH, a Cihydroxyalkyl) and 1-hydroxyethyl (-CHOHCH 3 , a C 2 hydroxyalkyl).
  • Thioalkyl refers to a sulfur atom substituted by an alkyl group, for example thio ethyl (CH 3 S-, a Cithioalkyl).
  • Modulating in connection with the activity of an ion channel means that the activity ofthe ion channel may be either increased or decreased in response to administration of a compound or composition or method ofthe present invention.
  • the ion channel may be activated, so as to transport more ions, or may be blocked, so that fewer or no ions are transported by the channel.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers” for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A.R. Gennaro edit. 1985).
  • sterile saline and phosphate-buffered saline at physiological pH maybe used.
  • Preservatives, stabilizers, dyes and even flavoring agents may be provided in the pharmaceutical composition.
  • sodium benzoate, sorbic acid and esters of j?-hydroxybenzoic acid may be added as preservatives. IcL at 1449.
  • antioxidants and suspending agents may be used.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to salts ofthe compounds ofthe present invention derived from the combination of such compounds and an organic or inorganic acid (acid addition salts) or an organic or inorganic base (base addition salts).
  • the compounds ofthe present invention maybe used in either the free base or salt forms, with both forms being considered as being within the scope ofthe present invention.
  • Aminocyclohexyl Ether Ion Channel Modulating Compounds [00136]
  • One class of compounds that are ion channel modulating compounds are compounds that comprise an aminocyclohexyl ether core structure having an ether oxygen atom at position 1 of a cyclohexane ring, and an amine nitrogen atom at position 2 ofthe cyclohexane ring. This core structure is shown below, with other positions numbered in corresponding order:
  • bonds from the cyclohexane ring of A to the 1 -oxygen and 2-nitrogen atoms in the above formula may be relatively disposed in either a cis or trans relationship.
  • the stereochemistry ofthe amine and ether substituents ofthe cyclohexane ring is either (R,K)-trans or (S,S)-trans.
  • the stereochemistry at these positions is either (R 5 S)-c/,s or (S,R)-cis.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula:
  • Compounds of formula (I) are aminocyclohexyl ethers. More specifically, these aminocyclohexyl ethers are substituted at position 2 ofthe cyclohexyl ring with an amine group -NR ⁇ R 2 .
  • the cyclohexyl ring may also be substituted with additional substituents (designated as R 3 and R ) as described in more detail below. Examples of specific compounds represented by formula (I) are described below.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may be primary, secondary, or tertiary amines (i.e., both R!
  • the compounds of formula (I) are tertiary amines, i.e., neither Ri nor R 2 is hydrogen. Where the amine is tertiary, it may be a cyclic amine.
  • Amine substituents Ri and R 2 may be independently selected from substituents which include hydrogen, alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C ⁇ -C 8 alkyl), alkoxyalkyl groups containing from three to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl), alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms where one ofthe carbon atoms is substituted with a hydroxyl group (i.e., C ⁇ -C 8 hydroxyalkyl), and aralkyl groups containing from seven to twelve carbon atoms (i.e., C 7 -C ⁇ 2 aralkyl).
  • substituents which include hydrogen, alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C ⁇ -C 8 alkyl), alkoxyalkyl groups containing from three to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl), alkyl groups containing from one to
  • Ri and R 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C 7 -C ⁇ 2 aralkyl. In another version, Ri and R 2 are independently selected from C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C 7 -C ⁇ 2 aralkyl.
  • R t and R 2 when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a ring denoted by formula (H):
  • the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C ⁇ -C 3 hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C 2 -C 4 acyl, C C 3 alkyl, C 2 -C alkylcarboxy, C ⁇ -C 3 alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 2 oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur (e.g., an acetal, thioacetal, ketal, or thioketal group); and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C 3 -
  • any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds.
  • the ring of formula (Et) may be saturated or unsaturated, and an unsaturated ring may contain one, or more than one, sites of unsaturation.
  • the ring of formula (II) may contain one or more double bonds, it being understood, however, that the unsaturated ring of formula (IT) is chemically stable.
  • Ri and R 2 when taken together with the 2-amino nitrogen of formula (I), may complete a bicyclic ring.
  • Bicyclic rings include, for example,
  • 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptane 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptane.
  • 2-substituents ofthe cyclohexyl ethers of formula (I) are the following groups: 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo-
  • Ri and R 2 when taken together may contain only a single heteroatom.
  • Preferred heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • An example of a ring in which Ri and R 2 together include an oxygen heteroatom is the mo ⁇ holinyl group.
  • An example of a ring where Ri and R 2 together include a second nitrogen heteroatom is the piperazinyl group.
  • Cyclohexane substituents R and 1 ⁇ may be independently attached to ring positions 3, 4, 5 or 6 (i.e., both R 3 and R 4 may be attached to the same ring position or each attached to different ring positions).
  • R 3 and R are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C]-C 6 alkyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, and, when both R 3 and R 4 are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur.
  • Preferred heterocyclic substituents contain either a single oxygen or a single sulfur ring atom.
  • the ether side chain, -CH(R 5 )-X-A, in formula (I) may take several forms.
  • a compound of formula (I) may have X as a
  • Y may be any of a direct bond, an oxygen atom (O), a sulfur atom (S) or a C ⁇ -C 4 alkylene group.
  • Re and Rj 4 are independently selected from hydrogen,
  • Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R$ and R i4 when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro CrCscycloalkyl.
  • compounds ofthe invention include compounds of formula (I) where R and R 14 are hydrogen and Y is a direct bond, such that X maybe CH 2 .
  • X may be an alkenylene moiety, e.g., a cis-o ⁇ tr ⁇ r ⁇ -alkenylene moiety,
  • C(R ⁇ 3 ) CH, where Rj 3 maybe any of hydrogen, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, aryl or benzyl.
  • X is an alkenylene moiety
  • X is preferably a tr ⁇ ns-alkenylene moiety.
  • X may be a direct bond.
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, Cj-C ⁇ alkyl, aryl and benzyl.
  • the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when Rj and R 2 are hydrogen.
  • the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when A is formula (HI) and each of R 7 , R 8 and R 9 is hydrogen. In another variation, the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when A is formula (HI).
  • Ether side chain component A is generally a hydrophobic moiety.
  • a hydrophobic moiety is comprised of non-polar chemical groups such as hydrocarbons or hydrocarbons substituted with halogens or ethers or heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atoms.
  • Suitable hydrocarbons are Cs-C ⁇ alkyl and C 3 -C ⁇ carbocyclic rings.
  • Particularly prefe ⁇ ed cyclic hydrocarbons include selected aromatic groups such as phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, indenyl, acenaphthyl, and fluorenyl and are represented by formulae (III), (TV), (V), (VI), (VII), or (Vm) respectively.
  • a suitable "A” group in the formula above is a phenyl ring represented by formula
  • R , R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
  • R15 and ⁇ 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 is preferably selected from amine (-NR15R16, where R15 and R ⁇ 6 are independently hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkyl), bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl,
  • Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkylcarbonyl, C ⁇ -C 6 thioalkyl or aryl groups are examples of compounds of formula
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are selected from amine
  • C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkylcarbonyl and
  • A does not include a phenyl ring of formula (El) when X is a direct bond.
  • Rio and ⁇ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkoxycarbonyl, C ⁇ -C 6 thioalkyl, and N(Ri 5 ,R ⁇ 6 ) where R ⁇ 5 and ( 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl.
  • Rio and Rn are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
  • R 15 and R ⁇ 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, as defined above.
  • R ⁇ 2 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C alkanoyloxy,
  • the aryl groups of formula (VI) are derivatives of indene, indole, benzofuran, and thianaphthene when Z is methylene, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, respectively.
  • Preferred heterocyclic groups of formula (VI) include indole where Z is NH, benzofuran where Z is O, and thianaphthene where Z is S. As described below, in a preferred embodiment, Z is O, S or N-R 17 , and in a particularly preferred embodiment Z is O or S.
  • Another suitable "A” group is acenaphthyl groups as represented by formula (VII):
  • Still another suitable "A” group is the fluorenyl group represented by formula (VIE):
  • ether side chain component A is an acenapthyl or fluorenyl group only when X is a direct bond or CH .
  • the acenaphthyl group is a
  • the fluorenyl group is a 9-fluorenyl group.
  • X is (CH 2 )-Y.
  • Y is preferably a direct bond, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • Y is a direct bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Y is a direct bond and X is
  • R 6 ,R ⁇ 4 where Re and R ⁇ 4 are as defined above.
  • R 3 and R ⁇ may be independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5- positions.
  • ring of formula (E) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more of the additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C ⁇ -C 3 hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C 2 -C 4 acyl, C ⁇ -C 3 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkylcarboxy, C ⁇ -C 3 alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 2 oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C 3 -C 8 carbocyclic ring, and any one or more of the additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substitute
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkoxycarbonyl, C ⁇ -C 6 thioalkyl and N(R ⁇ s,Ri ⁇ ) where R 15 and R ⁇ 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl and C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl;
  • VE (VET) including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and solvates and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of any ofthe foregoing.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (LX), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (X), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Ri, R 2 , R ⁇ and Rj 4 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R and R 4 are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5 -positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy; and A is selected from Cs-C ⁇ alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
  • R ⁇ 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XI), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Ri and R 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R 3 and R are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy; and A is selected from C 5 -C ⁇ 2 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
  • R ⁇ 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XII), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Ri and R 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R 3 and ⁇ are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy; and A is selected from Cs-C ⁇ 2 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
  • R ⁇ are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XIE), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Y, Ri R 2j R ⁇ and Rj 4 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I);
  • R 3 and R> are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy;
  • A is selected from C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl and any of formulae (ET), (TV), (V), (VT),
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XIV), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Ri and R 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I);
  • A is selected from any of formulae (IE), (IV), (V) and (VI) as above for compounds of formula (I), wherein R 7 , Rio, R ⁇ , and R ⁇ 2 , are hydrogen, R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methanesulfonamido, methanoyloxy, methoxycarbonyl, nitro, sulfamyl, thiomethyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and NH 2 , with the proviso that at least one of
  • Rs and R 9 is not hydrogen; and Z is selected from O and S.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XV), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • Ri and R 2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); and A is selected from any of formulae (Bl), (IV), (V) and (VI) as defined above for compounds of formula (I), wherein R 7 , R !0 , R ⁇ , and R ⁇ 2 , are hydrogen, R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methanesulfonamido, methanoyloxy, methoxycarbonyl, nitro, sulfamyl, thiomethyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and NH 2 , with the proviso that at least one of
  • R 8 and R 9 is not hydrogen; and Z is selected from O and S.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XVI), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XVTJ), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof: (XVE) wherein, independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 2 and 3; Rig is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions; R 19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen; and R o is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof.
  • the amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds the amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds.
  • n is selected from 1, 2 and 3;
  • R ⁇ 8 is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions;
  • R 19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen;
  • R 20 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (TXX); or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • TXX wherem, independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 2 and 3; Ri 8 is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions; R 19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen; and R 2 o is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof:
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherem, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, * and R 5 are independently selected from Cr alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R 5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 3 is hydrogen, i and R 5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
  • prodrug thereof (XXI) wherein, R 3 , Ri and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, » and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R5 are independently selected from Cj-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, j and R 5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R and R 5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof:
  • R 3 , R 4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, Rj and R 5 are independently selected from Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, i and R5 are independently selected from CpC ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, i and R5 are d alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
  • prodrug thereof (XXITJ) wherein, R 3 , R and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 . and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 3 is hydrogen, 4 and R 5 are independently selected from Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, j and R 5 are independently selected from Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 3 is hydrogen, Rj and R5 are Cialkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 3 is hydrogen, Rj and R 5 are Cialkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
  • R and R 5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of fo ⁇ nula (XXJN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R 4 . and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and -C ⁇ alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from hydroxy and C ⁇ -C 3 alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, 4 and R 5 are independently selected from
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R and R 5 are independently selected from C ⁇ -C alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, Ri and R 5 are Ci alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R 4 and R 5 are alkoxy.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXV),
  • R 3 , R 4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy; or, R 3 , I t are independently selected from hydroxyl and C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxy and R 5 is hydrogen; or, R 3 , R 4 are both Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy and R 5 is hydrogen; or R 3 , R are both methoxy and R 5 is hydrogen; or including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, with the proviso that R , * and R 5 cannot all be hydrogen; and rv ru "° indicates a bond that provides a R stereoisomer or a S stereoisomer at the position to which the bond is attached.
  • the hydroxyl substituent is positioned at the 3 position ofthe pyrrolidinyl ring in (XXV).
  • the stereochemistry at the position of the cycloalkyl ring of (XXV) containing the nitrogen group is racemic, which may be provided for any ofthe variations mentioned above.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVI):
  • the — bond to the ether oxygen indicates that the ether and amine groups attached to the cyclohexyl group are in a trans configuration, and the C-l and C-2 carbons ofthe cyclohexyl group may be either R,R configuration or S,S configuration;
  • Ri and R 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ -C alkyl, C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl, Cr hydroxyalkyl, and C 7 -C ⁇ 2 aralkyl; or Ri and R 2 are independently selected from C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl, C ⁇ -C 8 hydroxyalkyl, and C 7 -C ⁇ 2 aralkyl; or Ri and R 2 , are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (XXVI) to form a ring denoted by formula (IV):
  • ring of formula (IN) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C ⁇ -C 3 hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C 2 -C 4 acyl, -
  • C 3 -C 8 carbocyclic ring and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C 4 acyl, C 2 -
  • Ri and R 2 when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (XXVI), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3 azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan 3 yl, 2 azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan 2 yl, 3 azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan 3 yl and 3 azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan 3 yl;
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ thioalkyl and N(R
  • R 3 and j are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • both R 3 and R ⁇ t are Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • both R 3 and Rj are methoxy.
  • R 3 and K are positioned at the 3 and 4 positions ofthe aromatic ring, wherein the position on the aromatic ring containing the alkyl chain is designated the 1 position, this variation may be combined with any other variation mentioned above.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVE), or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVTJi), (xxvm) (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride .
  • the ion channel modulating compound is compound or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof, or mixture comprising one or more said compounds or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof, selected from the group consisting of:
  • compositions that includes one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table, or includes a solvate or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table.
  • the composition may or may not include additional components. Additional components that may be used are described elsewhere in detail in this patent.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound or mixture comprising compounds, or any solvate thereof, selected from the group consisting of:
  • composition that includes one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table, or includes a solvate or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more, of the compounds or mixtures listed in the above table.
  • the composition may or may not include additional components. Additional components that may be used are described elsewhere in detail in this patent.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is one ofthe following compounds: (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)- Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenefhoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (1 S,2S)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrroli
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether compounds described in this patent. That is, for each amino cyclohexyl ether compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, and may be present in solution.
  • quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002.
  • One class of compounds that are ion channel modulating compound comprise an aminocycloalkyl ether core structure having an ether oxygen atom at position 1 of a cycloalkyl ring, and an amine nitrogen atom at position 2 ofthe cycloalkyl ring.
  • the cycloalkyl ring is a 5, 7, or 8 membered ring.
  • the bonds from the cycloalkyl ring to the 1 -oxygen and 2-nitrogen atoms in the above formula may be relatively disposed in either a cis or trans relationship.
  • the stereochemistry ofthe amine and ether substituents ofthe cycloalkyl ring is either (R,R)-trans or (S,S)-trans.
  • the stereochemistry is either (R,S)-cz ' s or (S,R)-cz ' s.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a compound of formula (IXXX):
  • the cycloalkyl ring may also be substituted with additional substituents (designated as R 3 and R t ) as described in more detail below.
  • n is selected from 1, 3 and 4, and represents a number of carbon atoms such that when n equals 1, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cyclopentane (i.e., a cyclopentyl group), when n equals 3, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cycloheptane (i.e., a cycloheptyl group), and when n equals 4, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cyclooctane (i.e., a cyclooctyl group). Examples of specific compounds represented by formula (LXXX) are described below
  • (LXXX) maybe primary, secondary, or tertiary amines (i.e., both Ri and R 2 are hydrogen, only one of Ri and R 2 is hydrogen, or neither of Ri and R 2 are hydrogen, respectively).
  • Amine substituents Ri and R 2 may be independently selected from substituents which include hydrogen, alkyl groups contaming from one to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C ⁇ -C 8 alkyl), alkoxyalkyl groups containing from three to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C 3 -C 8 alkoxyalkyl), alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms where one ofthe carbon atoms is substituted with a hydroxyl group (i.e., C ⁇ -
  • Ri and R 2 when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (LXXX), may form a ring denoted by formula (11):
  • the ring of formula (E) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C ⁇ -C hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C 2 -C 4 acyl, C]-C 3 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkylcarboxy, C r C 3 alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 2 oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur (e.g., an acetal, thioacetal, ketal, or thioketal group); and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C -
  • any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds.
  • the ring of formula (IT) may be saturated or unsaturated, and an unsaturated ring may contain one, or more than one, sites of unsaturation.
  • the ring of formula (E) may contain one or more double bonds, it being understood, however, that the unsaturated ring of formula (E) is chemically stable.
  • Bicyclic rings include, for example,
  • Ri and R 2 when taken together, contain only a single heteroatom.
  • Preferred heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • An example of a ring in which Ri and R together include an oxygen heteroatom is the mo ⁇ holinyl group.
  • An example of a ring where i and R 2 together include a second nitrogen heteroatom is the piperazinyl group.
  • Cycloalkyl substituents R 3 and R 4 may be independently attached to any ofthe ring positions except positions 1 and 2 (e.g., both R 3 and 4 may be attached to the same ring position or each attached to different ring positions).
  • R 3 and R4 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-C 6 alkyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, and, when both R 3 and P ⁇ are attached to the same cycloalkyl ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur.
  • Preferred heterocyclic substituents contain either a single oxygen or a single sulfur ring atom.
  • (LXXX) may take several forms.
  • a compound of formula (IXXX) may have X as a -C(R ⁇ ,R ⁇ 4 )-Y- group, where Y may be any of a direct bond, an oxygen atom (O), a sulfur atom (S) or a C ⁇ -C 4 alkylene group.
  • R 6 and R 14 are independently selected from hydrogen,
  • Ci-C 6 alkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R and R ⁇ 4 when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C -C5Cycloalkyl.
  • compounds ofthe invention include compounds of formula (LXXX) where R 6 and R ⁇ 4 are hydrogen and Y is a direct bond, such that X maybe CH 2 .
  • X may be an alkenylene moiety, e.g., a cis-or tr ⁇ /zs-alkenylene moiety,
  • R ]3 may be any of hydrogen, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, aryl or benzyl.
  • X is preferably a tr ⁇ ws-alkenylene moiety.
  • X may be a direct bond.
  • R 5 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, aryl and benzyl.
  • Ether sidechain component A is generally a hydrophobic moiety.
  • a hydrophobic moiety is comprised of non-polar chemical groups such as hydrocarbons or hydrocarbons substituted with halogens or ethers or heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atoms.
  • Suitable hydrocarbons are Cs-C ⁇ 2 alkyl and C 3 -C ⁇ 3 carbocyclic rings.
  • Particularly preferred cyclic hydrocarbons include selected aromatic groups such as phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, indenyl, acenaphthyl, and fluorenyl and are represented by formulae (IE), (IV), (V), (VI), (VE), or (VET) respectively.
  • a suitable "A” group within the compounds ofthe present invention is a phenyl ring represented by formula (ET):
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
  • R15 and Ri ⁇ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-C 6 alkyl.
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 is preferably selected from amine (- R 1 5R16, where R1 5 and Rj 6 are independently hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci -Chalky!), bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ thioalkyl or aryl groups.
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are preferably a substituent other than hydrogen.
  • R 7 , R 8 and R 9 are 1 -naphthyl groups as represented by formula (IN):
  • R o and R ⁇ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
  • R ⁇ 5 and Ri ⁇ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • Rio and Ru are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Cj-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C 7 alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ thioalkyl, and N(Ri 5 ,R 16 ) where R 5 and Rj 6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-C ⁇ alkyl, as defined above.
  • Other suitable "A" groups in compounds ofthe present invention are aromatic groups represented by formula (VI):
  • R i2 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy,
  • the aryl groups of formula (VI) are derivatives of indene, indole, benzofuran, and thianaphthene when Z is methylene, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, respectively.
  • Preferred heterocyclic groups of formula (VI) include indole where Z is NH, benzofuran where Z is O, and thianaphthene where Z is S. As described below, in a preferred embodiment, Z is O, S or
  • N-R 17 and in a particularly preferred embodiment Z is O or S.
  • Still another suitable "A” group in compounds ofthe present invention is the fluorenyl group represented by formula (VET): (VET)
  • ether sidechain component A is an acenapthyl or fluorenyl group only when X is a direct bond or CH 2 .
  • the acenaphthyl group is a 1 -acenaphthyl group
  • the fluorenyl group is a 9-fluorenyl group.
  • X is (CH 2 )-Y.
  • Y is a direct bond, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • Y is a direct bond or an oxygen atom.
  • Y is a direct bond and X is C(Re,Ri 4 ), where R ⁇ and R ⁇ are as defined above.
  • R 3 and 1 ⁇ are preferably independently attached to the cycloalkyl ring at the 4- or
  • V_ 2 (E) wherein the ring of formula (H) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may bear one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, C ⁇ -C 3 hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C 2 -C 4 acyl, C ⁇ -C 3 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkylcarboxy, CrC 3 alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 2 oalkanoyloxy, or may form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C 3 -C 8 carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may bear substituents selected from
  • R 12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 7 alkanoyloxy, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, C 2 -C alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C ⁇ thioalkyl, and N(Ri 5 ,Ri 6 ) where R 15 and Ri ⁇ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH 2 , O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (LXXX) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to R ⁇ 7 when Z is N, and R ⁇ is selected from hydrogen, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, aryl
  • the ion channel modulating compound is one ofthe following compounds or mixtures of compounds.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether compounds described in this patent. That is, for each amino cycloalkyl ether compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, and may be present in solution.
  • quaternary protenated amine form of the compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002.
  • any compound that modulates ion channel activity may by an ion channel modulating compound.
  • a compound that modulates ion channel activity may be a compound that increases or decreases ion channel activity.
  • An ion channel modulating compound that decreases ion channel activity may be a compound that blocks ion channel activity completely or partially.
  • any compound that either singly or together with one or more additional compounds selectively inhibit certain combination of cardiac ionic currents is an ion channel modulating compound.
  • the cardiac currents may be the sodium currents and early repolarizing currents.
  • Ion channel modulating compounds may block cardiac currents from extracellular loci. Such compounds act on an external locus ofthe ion channel that is accessible from the extracellular surface. This facilitates access to the ion channel and provides rapid onset kinetics and exhibits frequency dependent blockade of currents. Such properties are all beneficial for compounds used to treat arrhythmias.
  • An ion channel modulating compound may selectively inhibit cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium cunents.
  • Ion channel modulating compounds may be used to selectively inhibit cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents under conditions where an "arrhythmogenic substrate" is present in the heart.
  • An "arrhythmogemc substrate” is characterized by a reduction in cardiac action potential duration and/or changes in action potential mo ⁇ hology, premature action potentials, high heart rates and may also include increased variability in the time between action potentials and an increase in cardiac milieu acidity due to ischaemia or inflammation. Changes such as these are observed during conditions of myocardial ischaemia or inflammation and those conditions that precede the onset of arrhythmias such as atrial fibrillation.
  • An ion channel modulating compound may be an atrial selective agent.
  • An ion channel modulating compound may treat or prevent ventricular arrhythmia.
  • An ion channel modulating compound block cardiac sodium currents or cardiac early repolarizing currents.
  • An ion channel modulating compound may inhibit multiple cardiac ionic currents.
  • An ion channel modulating compound may be used to treat or prevent anhythmic, including ventricular or atrial arrhythmia, particularly atrial fibrillation.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds may block the cardiac ion channels responsible for early repolarizing currents and sodium cu ⁇ ents; and/or block cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents under conditions where an arrhythmogenic substrate is present in the heart; and/or block the cardiac ion channels responsible for early repolarizing currents and sodium currents under conditions where an arrhythmogenic substrate is present in the heart; and/or block cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents from extracellular loci in cardiac cells.
  • the cardiac early repolarizing currents referred to above comprise ionic currents which activate rapidly after depolarization of membrane voltage and which effect repolarization ofthe cell.
  • the early repolarizing currents may comprise the cardiac transient outward potassium cu ⁇ ent (I t0 ) and/or the ultrarapid delay rectifier current (I ⁇ Ur )-
  • the cardiac transient outward potassium cunent (I t0 ) and or the ultrarapid delay rectifier current (T ⁇ Ur ) may comprise at least one ofthe Kv4.2, Kv4.3, Kv2.1, Kvl.4 and Kvl.5 currents.
  • Ion channel modulating compounds may generally have any pKa, however ion channel modulating compounds typically have pKa values of between 4-9, and may have pKa values that are less than 8, including pKa values between 5-7.5. Methods to determine pKa values are well known in the art (see, e.g., Perrin, "Dissociation Constants of Organic Bases in Aqueous Solution", Butterworth, London, 1972). For ion channel modulating compounds with the specific ranges of pKa described above, the fraction ofthe charged (protonated) species will be increased under the pathological conditions such as cardiac arrhythmias and the presence of an arrhythmogenic substrate in the heart as described above due to the increase in cardiac milieu acidity.
  • one of J and K comprises a hydrophobic moiety, such as but not limited to a moiety comprising alkyl and/or aryl moieties.
  • one of J and K comprises a hydrophobic aromatic moiety, which may be attached to the cycloalkane ring of structure T via an ether bond.
  • one of J and K comprises a hydrophilic moiety, such as a heteroatom containing moiety, including but not limited to a nitrogen containing moiety that is available to form a quaternary salt and/or a hydroxyl moiety.
  • one of J and K comprises a nitrogen containing moiety substituted with a hydroxyl moiety or the like, such as a pyrrolidinyl moiety.
  • n 2
  • J comprises a aromatic moiety
  • K comprises a nitrogen containing moiety substituted with a hydroxyl moiety or the like.
  • the cycloalkane ring may be optionally substituted.
  • the cycloalkane ring may be replaced by a structural moiety imparting rigidity to the relative positions ofthe J and K groups.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be a compound of formula where J and K are as described above and groups P and R are moieties such that there is not substantial rotation about the L-M bond.
  • P and Q taken together form a cyclic moiety that prevents substantial rotation about the L-M bond.
  • the ion channel modulating compound comprises an amino substituted 5, 6, 7 or 8-membered ring, which may be a 5, 6, 7, or 8-membered substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl ring.
  • the amino substituted cycloalkane ring may be an aminocyclohexyl ring and may be further substituted with one or more additional moieties.
  • the amino substituted cycloalkane ring is further substituted with an ether moiety.
  • the ion channel modulating compound comprises an aminocyclohexyl ring that is further substituted with an ether moiety.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in this patent. That is, for each ion channel modulating compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino ion channel modulating compound. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amo ⁇ hous form, and may he present in solution. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002
  • the ion channel modulating compounds and formulations described herein may be formulated in a dosage form suitable for oral, parenteral, mucosal, nasal, sublingual, transdermal, buccal, topical, vaginal, rectal, ocular or other administration.
  • An ion channel modulating compounds as described herein may be in the form of an immediate and/or modified release formulation or it may be designed to release the ion channel modulating compound in a relatively fast manner in order to enable a relatively fast onset ofthe therapeutic effect.
  • “compounds” and “compositions" of ion channel modulating compounds includes the ion channel modulating compounds as described herein alone or in combination with other materials, as described below.
  • the amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound present in a composition depends inter alia on the specific ion channel modulating compound and formulation, the age and condition ofthe subject, and the disease or conditions to be treated and/or prevented, the route of administration, and the dosage frequency.
  • the dosage frequency also depends on the disease or condition to be treated and/or prevented, amount or concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound, the specific composition used, the route of administration, and may inco ⁇ orate subject-specific variation including, but not limited to age, weight, gender, genetic background, and overall health.
  • a nasal formulation may be administered once daily e.g.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can be used to provide controlled release ("controlled release formulations") in which the release ofthe ion channel modulating compound is controlled and regulated to allow less frequency of dosing or to improve the pharmacokinetic or toxicity profile of a given active ingredient.
  • controlled release formulations as described herein may allow dosage once, twice, or three or more times daily in order to obtain a suitable therapeutic effect.
  • Controlled release may also include continuous and/or sustained release, for example, as from an implantable device. Pulsatile release may also be desirable. Administration may comprise co- administration of more than one dosage unit, such as, e.g. 2-4 dosage units.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds described herein are formulated for use in humans. Ion channel modulating compounds can also include veterinary formulations, e.g., pharmaceutical preparations suitable for veterinary uses, e.g., for the treatment of livestock or domestic animals, e.g., dogs, cats, racehorses, etc.
  • the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including but not limited to the activity ofthe ion channel modulating compound (or the ester, salt, amide or formulation thereof); the route of administration; the time of administration; the rate of excretion ofthe particular ion channel modulating compound being employed; the duration of the treatment; other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the ion channel modulating compound described herein; the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history ofthe subject being treated; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount ofthe pharmaceutical composition required.
  • the physician or veterinarian could start doses ofthe ion channel modulating compound at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired therapeutic effect is achieved.
  • a suitable dose of an ion channel modulating compound will be the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed formulations include oral (immediate or quick release forms) and intravenous forms (TV), nasal forms, sublingual and metered dose inhaler forms.
  • intravenous and oral forms ofthe ion channel modulating compound for a subject will range from about 0.1 to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
  • a therapeutic dosage for the intravenous form may be from about 0.1 to about 10 mg per kilogram.
  • Another suitable dosage of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for the intravenous form may be from about 2 to about 5 mg per kilogram.
  • a therapeutic dosage for oral administration may be from about 30 to about 1800 mg tablets or capsules b.i.d.
  • Another suitable dosage of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for oral administration maybe from about 300 to about 900 mg tablets or capsules b.i.d.
  • intranasal formulations and patch formulations are also preferred forms.
  • intranasal formulations and patch formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound for a subject will range from about 0.1 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10 mg per kilogram, even more preferably from about 1 to about 10 mg per kilogram.
  • the effective dose ofthe ion channel modulating compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms.
  • the subject receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets such as dogs and cats among others in general.
  • the ion channel modulating compound described herein may be administered to a subject by any route capable of delivering a therapeutically effective amount ofthe compound including but not limited to administration by oral, parenteral, intracranial, mtraorbital, intracapsular, intraspinal, intracistemal, intrapulmonary, intravenous, intramuscular, intra- arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, enteral, topical, sublingual, buccal, gingival, palatal or rectal means.
  • the ion channel modulating compound is given in forms suitable for each administration route.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be administered parenterally by injection, infusion or inhalation; administered topically by lotion or ointment; or administered rectally by suppositories.
  • Typical forms of administration described herein are not intended to be either limiting or exhaustive, but merely illustrative.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein mean modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
  • systemic administration or “administered systemically,” as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material such as the ion modulating compound so that it enters the subject's system by a direct route or parenteral route and thus is subject to metabolism and other like processes (for example, by subcutaneous administration).
  • peripheral administration and “administered peripherally” as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material such as the ion modulating compound so that it enters the subject's system by an indirect or localized route and thus is subject to metabolism and other like processes (for example, by topical administration).
  • the ion channel modulating compounds described herein can be formulated into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms such as described, or other dosage forms known to those of skill in the art.
  • phrases "pharmaceutically acceptable” as used herein can refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds can be administered alone or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable and/or sterile carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with other drugs (e.g. other cardiovascular agents, antimicrobial agents, etc.). Multiple routes of simultaneous or sequential administration (e.g. oral and transdermal) are also contemplated.
  • Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds can be formulated in any manner suitable for a desired delivery route.
  • formulations include all physiologically acceptable compositions.
  • Such formulations may include one or more ion channel modulating compounds by itself or in combination with any physiologically acceptable carrier or carriers.
  • the formulation may also enhance, alter, or modify the effect or the ion channel modulating compound and/or physiological milieu ofthe ion channel modulating compound.
  • an ion channel modulating compound While it is possible for an ion channel modulating compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the ion channel modulating compounds as a pharmaceutical formulation including other materials.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds may be formulated for administration in any way for use in human or veterinary medicine.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be active itself, or may be a prodrug, e.g., capable of being converted to an active compound in a physiological setting.
  • the ion channel modulating compounds described herein may provide pharmaceutically acceptable formulations with therapeutically effective amounts of one or more of ion channel modulating compounds, formulated with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives), other active agents, and/or diluents.
  • Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds maybe for administration in solid, liquid, vapor, or suspension form, including those adapted for oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, polymer release formulations, pastes for application to the tongue; parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin; or intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, suppository, cream or foam.
  • oral administration for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, polymer release formulations, pastes for application to the tongue
  • parenteral administration for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example,
  • Ion channel modulating compounds as described herein may be formulated for administration with any biologically acceptable medium, including but not limited to water, buffered saline, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol and the like) or suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the optimum concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the chosen medium can be determined empirically, according to procedures well known in the art.
  • biologically acceptable medium includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, and the like which may be appropriate for the desired route of administration ofthe pharmaceutical preparation.
  • the use of a biologically acceptable medium for pharmaceutically active substances is known in the art. Suitable biologically acceptable media and their formulation are described, for example, in the most recent version of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences. Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., USA 1985).
  • Formulations may contain suitable physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and/or auxiliaries which facilitate processing ofthe ion channel modulating compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include agents which increase or otherwise affect the bioavailability ofthe drug.
  • bioavailability refers to the effect, availability and persistence ofthe ion channel modulating compound after being administered to a subject.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can be any pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition, or vehicle, including but not limited to a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject agonists to an organ, or portion ofthe body. Each carrier must be compatible with the other ingredients ofthe formulation and not injurious to the subject.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but are not limited to sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; cocoa butter, waxes, animal and vegetable fats, paraffins, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, zinc oxide; oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols, such as propylene glycol; polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts such as inorganic and organic acid or base addition salts ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described herein. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19). In particular, HCI salts ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may be used.
  • salt forms include hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, bisulphate, acid citrate, bitartrate, ethansulphonate, sulphate, phosphate or acid phosphate, acetate, maleate, fumarate, lactate, tartrate, L- tartrate, citrate, gluconate, benzenesulphonate (besylate), p-toluenesulphonate (tosylate), methanesulphonate ( esylate), esylate, succinate, salicylate, nitrate, sulfate, etc.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds can also include wetting agents; emulsifiers and lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate; coloring agents; release agents; coating agents; sweetening, flavoring, and/or perfuming agents; preservatives; and antioxidants.
  • wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coloring agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coloring agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coloring agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coloring agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coloring agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • release agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate
  • coating agents such as sweetening, flavoring, and/or perfuming agents
  • antioxidants include but are not limited to water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
  • Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also inco ⁇ orate buffering agents and/or salts to aid abso ⁇ tion or stabilize the ion channel modulating compound.
  • Other additives such as chelating agents, enzymatic inhibitors, and the like, which would facilitate the biological activity ofthe pharmaceutical composition may also be inco ⁇ orated in the formulation.
  • Fo ⁇ nulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also contain opacifying agents.
  • the formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods known in the art.
  • the amount of ion channel modulating compound that can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form may vary.
  • the amount of ion channel modulating compound in a given formulation may depend upon the host being treated and/or the particular mode of administration.
  • the amount of ion channel modulating compound which can be combined with a carrier to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
  • Methods of preparing these formulations include the step of bringing into association an ion channel modulating compound with the carrier and/or one or more accessory ingredients. Some formulations may be prepared by bringing an ion channel modulating compound in association with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for oral administration maybe in the form of a solid (capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges, powders, dragees, granules); or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion; or as an elixir or syrup; or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia); and/or as mouth rinses or washes and the like; or as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • a solid capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges, powders, dragees, granules
  • a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion; or as an elixir
  • Solid formulations of ion channel modifying compounds may have pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and extenders including but not limited to sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate; starches; lactose; sucrose; glucose; mannitol; and/or silicic acid.
  • Solid formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can include additional components including but not limited to binders such as carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; humectants such as glycerol; disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; solution retarding agents such as paraffin; abso ⁇ tion accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds; wetting agents such as cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay; lubricants such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and coloring agents.
  • binders such as carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone
  • the formulation may also include buffering agents, particularly when the ion channel modulating compound is in the form of a capsule, tablet or pill.
  • Solid formulations may also include fillers for soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using excipients such as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • Solid formulations such as pills and tablets may be formed by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of powdered ion channel modulating compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • Solid formulations of ion channel modulating compounds described herein may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings.
  • Solid dosage forms may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release ofthe ion channel modulating compound.
  • solid formulations could include any material that could provide a desired release profile ofthe ion channel modulating compound, including but not limited to hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions, or other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres .
  • Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also be formulated to release the ion channel modulating compound only, or preferentially, in a certain portion ofthe gastrointestinal tract, for example, by including an embedding agent.
  • embedding agents which can be used include but are not limited to polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may also be in microencapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more ofthe above-described excipients.
  • Coated or encapsulating formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also be formulated to deliver pulsatile, sustained, or extended release.
  • one method of pulsatile release could be achieved by layering multiple coatings of ion channel modulating compound, or by inco ⁇ orating the ion channel modulating compound within different regions ofthe formulation having different release times.
  • Liquid dosage formulations for oral administration ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage formulations may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, including but not limited to water or other solvents; solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol; oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils); glycerol; tetrahydrofuryl alcohol; polyethylene glycols; and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • inert diluents commonly used in the art, including but not limited to water or other solvents; solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol,
  • the ion channel modulating compound may also be formulated as a suspension.
  • Suspensions ofthe ion channel modulating compound may include suspending agents.
  • suspending agents include but are not limited to ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols; polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters; microcrystalline cellulose; aluminum metahydroxide; bentonite; agar-agar; tragacanth; and mixtures thereof.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository.
  • Suppository formulations may be prepared by mixing one or more ion channel modulating compounds with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers.
  • suitable earners include any compound which is solid at room temperature but liquid at body temperature, and therefore will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the ion channel modulating compound.
  • Examples of such carriers include but are not limited to cocoa butter; polyethylene glycol; a suppository wax or a salicylate.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for the topical or transdermal administration include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
  • Powders and sprays may contain, in addition to an ion channel modulating compound, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays may contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • the ion channel modulating compound may also be formulated as a transdermal patch.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery ofthe ion channel modulating compound into the body.
  • Such formulations may be made by dissolving or dispersing the ion channel modulating compound in the proper medium.
  • Abso ⁇ tion enhancers may also be used to increase the flux ofthe compound across the skin.
  • the rate of flux maybe controlled. Examples of ways of controlling the rate of flux include but are not limited to rate controlling membranes or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Ophthalmic formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound include, but are not limited to, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like.
  • Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds for parenteral administration may have one or more ion channel modulating compound in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use.
  • Parenteral formulations may contain antioxidants; buffers or solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood ofthe intended subject; bacteriostats; suspending; or thickening agents.
  • Injectable depot formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can be made by forming microencapsulated matrices ofthe ion channel modulating compounds in biodegradable polymers.
  • biodegradable polymers include, but are not limited to polylactide-polyglycolide, poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • the ratio of ion channel modulating compound to polymer and the nature ofthe particular polymer employed can affect the rate of ion channel modulating compound released.
  • Depot injectable formulations can also be prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions.
  • Proper fluidity of liquid, suspension and other formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds can be maintained by the use of coating materials such as lecithin; by the maintenance ofthe required particle size in the case of dispersions; or by the use of surfactants.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include anti- contamination agents for the prevention of microorganism contamination.
  • Anti- contamination agents may include but are not limited to antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound may also be sterilized by, for example, by filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by inco ⁇ orating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid formulations which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile medium immediately before use or formulation.
  • Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like.
  • the ion channel modulating compound In some cases it is desirable to prolong the effect ofthe ion channel modulating compound. This may be accomplished in formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound that slow the abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amo ⁇ hous material having poor water solubility. The rate of abso ⁇ tion ofthe ion channel modulating compound then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed abso ⁇ tion of a parenterally administered drug form can be accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Prolonged abso ⁇ tion formulations for injection can include agents which delay abso ⁇ tion including but not limited to aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • Ion channel modulating compounds can be given per se or as formulations containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of ion channel modulating compound.
  • ion channel modulating compounds described herein may be formulated as immediate release (IR) or controlled release (CR) tablets.
  • the ion channel modulating compound formulation contains (1R,2R)-
  • the drug is highly soluble in citrate solution (143 mg/mL), and has a pH of 3.2 in water, and a pKa of 8.32. It is anhydrous, and is stable under long term and accelerated conditions (ICH). Both IR and CR forms ofthe drug may be formulated so that a final dosage form exhibits many desirable properties including, but not limited to: good tabletting characteristics (e.g., good flow, compression, appearance, weight variation, hardness, friability, content uniformity and dissolution rate properties), good bioavailability profiles (e.g., 12-hour in- vivo drug release profile for the CR tablet), excellent stress and long-term stability, satisfies USP and EU standards, small tablet size, simple but efficient and cost- effective processing, and CR and TR tablets may have approximately the same weight and appearance.
  • good tabletting characteristics e.g., good flow, compression, appearance, weight variation, hardness, friability, content uniformity and dissolution rate properties
  • bioavailability profiles e.g., 12-hour in-
  • CR tablets may be made by inco ⁇ orating the drug within a matrix systems, including but not limited to: a hydrophilic matrix system, a hydrophobic (plastic matrix system), a hydrophilic/hydrophobic matrix system, a fat wax system, and a film-coated particulate system.
  • a matrix systems including but not limited to: a hydrophilic matrix system, a hydrophobic (plastic matrix system), a hydrophilic/hydrophobic matrix system, a fat wax system, and a film-coated particulate system.
  • Hydrophilic matrix systems show uniform and constant drug diffusion from a tablet prepared with a hydrophilic, gelling excipient after it is placed in an aqueous environment. Drug release is controlled by a gel diffusional barrier which is formed. The process is usually a combination of gel hydration, drug diffusion, and gel erosion.
  • Hydrophobic (plastic) matrix systems utilize inert, insoluble polymers and copolymers to form a porous skeletal structure in which the drug is embedded. Controlled drug release is effected by diffusion of drug through the capillary wetting channels and pores ofthe matrix, and by erosion of the matrix itself.
  • Hydrophilic/ hydrophobic matrix systems utilize a combination of hydrophilic and hydrophobic polymers that forms a soluble/insoluble matrix in which the drug is embedded. Drug release is by pore and gel diffusion as well as tablet matrix erosion. The hydrophilic polymer is expected to delay the rate of gel diffusion.
  • the drug In Fat-wax matrix systems, the drug is inco ⁇ orated in a hot melt of a fat-wax matrix, solidified sized and compressed with appropriate tablet ingredients. Controlled release ofthe drug is effected by pore diffusion and erosion ofthe fat-wax matrix. The addition of a surfactant as a wicking agent helps water penetration ofthe matrix to cause erosion.
  • Film-coated particulate systems include time-release granulations, prepared by extrusion- spheronization process or by conventional granulation process that have been film-coated to produce differing species of controlled release particles with specific drug release characteristics.
  • Controlled release particles may be compressed together with appropriate tabletting excipients to produce tablets with the desired controlled release profile. Drug release is by particle erosion in either acid (gastric) or alkaline (intestinal) pH.
  • Excipients that may be used for the above CR matrix systems are listed in tables 1 to 5 below. Outlined are the chemical and brand names, compendial status, function, and range of use levels.
  • CR formulations ofthe drug may be processed by methods including but not limited to: direct compression (dry blend of drug with flowable excipients followed by compression), wet granulation (application of a binder solution to powder blend, followed by drying, sizing, blending and compression), dry granulation or compaction (densifying the drug or drug/powder blend through slugging or with a compactor to obtain flowable, compressible granules), fat-wax mot melt granulation (embedding of drug in molten fatty alcohols, followed by cooling, sizing, blending and compression), and film-coating of particulates (dry blend, wet granulation, kneading, extrusion, spheronization, drying, film-coating, followed by blending of differing; species of film-coated spheres, and compression).
  • direct compression dry blend of drug with flowable excipients followed by compression
  • wet granulation application of a binder solution to powder blend, followed by drying
  • a 100 mg CR formulation containing fillers, a glidant, lubricants and a hydrophilic polymer is made by direct compression.
  • the drug is mixed with Starch 1500 in a small polyethylene (PE) bag then passed through a # 30 mesh screen.
  • the screened mix is then transferred to its original PE bag along with Prosolv SMCC90, Lactose Fast Flo and Methoeel K4M and mixed for 2 minutes.
  • a portion (e.g. lg) of this blend is then mixed with Magnesium Stearate and Stearic Acid in a PE bag, transferred back to the bulk blend via a #30 mesh screen and blended for 1 minute.
  • Tablets may be compressed with a suitable punch (e.g., a 9 mm punch) on a single punch press to obtain a tablet hardness of 7-12 KN.
  • a suitable punch e.g., a 9 mm punch
  • compositions of alternative formulations of CR tablets such as the hydrophobic and hot melt (solid dispersion) formulations are shown in the table below.
  • the hydrophilic composition is also shown for comparison.
  • Table 7 Proposed Initial Compositions for CR Matrix Tablets
  • TR tablets ofthe drug may be made by: direct compression (dry blend of drug with flowable excipients followed by compression), wet granulation (application of a binder solution to powder blend, followed by drying, sizing, blending and compression), dry granulation or compadtion (densifying API of API/powder blend through slugging or with a compactor to obtain flowable, compressible granules), or a combination of these steps.
  • Granules ofthe drug are sized, blended with the appropriate excipients and compressed in tablets.
  • a 100 mg IR formulation containing basic IR excipients may be made by direct compression.
  • This formulation is blended in small PE bags and subsequently compressed manually on a single punch bench tablet press with an appropriate tablet punch.
  • the ion channel modulating drug is mixed with Starch 1500 in a small polyethylene (PE) bag then passed through a # 30 mesh screen.
  • the screened mix is then transferred to its original PE bag along with Prosolv SMCC90, Lactose Fast Flo and Explotab and mixed for 2 minutes.
  • a portion e.g.
  • the release profile of active agent (such as the ion channel modulating compound) and any additives maybe empirically determined in vitro by examining the dissolution ofthe tablet over time.
  • a USP approved method for dissolution or release test can be used to measure the rate of release in vitro (USP 24; NF 19 (2000) pp. 1941-1951).
  • a weighed tablet of tlie drug e.g.
  • various TR and CR tabletted formulations of (lR,2R)-2-[(3R Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride may have in vivo cumulative percentage release profiles the same as or substantially the same as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
  • Figure 2 shows that release profile (percent cumulative release over time) for the TR formulation ofthe ion channel modulating compound. This H formulation is described in Table 10, Part I below. More than 80% ofthe drug in the IR. form has dissolved by fifteen minutes.
  • Release profiles for different CR formulations show that the CR formulations dissolve in hours rather than minutes ( Figure 3).
  • Figure 3 shows a comparison of four different hydrophilic CR tablets, a hydrophilic non-cellulose tablet, a hot-melt wax tablet, and two hydrophobic tablets.
  • the formulations of these CR forms are given in Table 10, Part I and Table 10, Part E.
  • Ion Channel Modulating Drug (C20H31NO4.HCI) Starch pregelatinized 1500 Silicified Microcrystalline Cellulose -Prosolv SMCC90 Lactose Fast Flo Sodium Starch Glycolate -Explotab Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose- Methocel K4M Cetostearyl Alcohol - Kalcol6850 Polyethylene Glycol 8000 Kollidon SR Ethyl Cellulose Standard 4 Eudragit RSPO Anhydrous Emcompress Stearic Acid Magnesium Stearate-Non-Bovine
  • the ion channel modulating compounds herein may also be used in conjunction or combination with biomedical devices, including but not limited to applying the ion channel modulating compound as a component of a biomedical device, such as coating the ion channel modulating compound on a device to achieve an extended, immediate, or controlled release; administering the ion channel modulating compound in coordination with a treatment such as administering pre- or post-operatively to a subject; or releasing the ion channel modulating compound from a biomedical device as needed, such as release from a "smart" pacemaker or cardiac sensor.
  • Rechargeable or biodegradable devices could deliver controlled release ofthe ion channel modulating compounds to a subject.
  • Such devices include but are not limited to slow release polymeric devices for the controlled delivery of drugs, for example proteinaceous biopharmaceuticals; and osmotic pumps and osmotic tables.
  • a variety of biocompatible polymers including hydrogels), including both biodegradable and non-degradable polymers, could form an implant for the sustained release ofthe ion channel modulating compound at a particular site, including a target site.
  • An implantable or external pump system could also be used to deliver ion channel modulating compounds.
  • Ion channel modulating compounds could also be delivered via inco ⁇ oration as a coating onto a biomedical device, such as an implantable device (e.g. a heart valve).
  • Implantable systems inco ⁇ orating the ion channel modulating system could be implanted in a subject anywhere that would allow beneficial therapeutic effect, including but not limited to implantation in heart tissue or pericardial sacs.
  • Biomedical devices appropriate for use in conjunction with the ion channel modulating compounds described here could be used to treat or prevent cardiovascular disorders.
  • formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds could be used in combination or conjunction with angioplastic balloons, cardiac monitors, stents (including drug eluting stents), def ⁇ briUators, catheters and heart valves, vascular grafts, pacemaker leads, guide wires, and the like which are placed into the blood vessels or the heart or nearby tissue for pu ⁇ oses of monitoring or repair.
  • On-demand release forms inco ⁇ orating an ion channel modulating compound can be used for controlled release.
  • Hybrid devices delivering an ion channel modulating compound could inco ⁇ orate release based on sensing concentration of drug, a biological marker (e.g. enzyme level), or physiological need.
  • sensing devices could be pacemakers and/or implantable defibrillators modified to release drug upon demand.
  • Drug release could also be regulated and/or monitored by computer control.
  • Example 1 Termination of atrial fibrillation - Step dosing TV study in human subjects [0297] A prospective double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized, dose-response trial was conducted. The compound used in these studies is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, which has structural formula
  • Patients were excluded for the following reasons: female patients of child-bearing potential; weight >300 lb; history of long QT syndrome, torsade de pointes or an uncorrected QT interval of >450 ms; QRS > 120 ms; myocardial infarction, symptoms of angina, congestive heart failure, or stroke within the previous 3 months; cardiac surgery in the previous 6 months; bradycardia ( ⁇ 50 bpm) or sick sinus syndrome unless controlled by a pacemaker; digoxin toxicity; or other reversible cause of atrial fibrillation (such as hyperthyroidism, pulmonary embolism, alcohol intoxication, acute pericarditis); Wolff- Parkinson-White syndrome; COPD requiring daily-bronchodilation therapy; cyanotic or other significant congenital heart disease; concurrent treatment with known QT prolonging drags or class I or IE anti-arrhythmic agents (unless the medication was discontinued more than five half-lives before enrollment); oral amiodarone in the prior 6
  • ECGs were inte ⁇ reted by individual investigators and independently verified by a core lab cardiologist blinded to study treatment.
  • Venous blood samples were drawn for (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma concentrations at 0, 15, 30, 120, 240, 480 minutes, discharge and at atrial fibrillation termination or significant adverse events.
  • the infusion was discontinued if the arrhythmia terminated after 1 minute of verification, systolic blood pressure decreased to ⁇ 85 mm Hg or increased > 190 mm Hg, HR ⁇ 50 bpm, intolerable side effects or any change in rhythm or atrioventricular conduction occurred that in the investigator's opinion was a threat to patient safety, a new bundle-branch block developed, QRS increased >50%, uncorrected QT increased to 550 ms or > 25% of baseline or any polymo ⁇ hic VT was noted. If atrial fibrillation persisted past 1 hour after the last infusion, pacing or electrical cardioversion was permitted.
  • the sample size was based on estimates of a placebo conversion rate of 35%, (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxy ⁇ yrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride conversion rate of 60%, an alpha of 0.05 and a beta- of 0.9.
  • a priori up to 20 patients were to be recruited in each group to detect this difference, with an anticipated need of at least 18 evaluable patients per group.
  • the treatment allocation was as follows: placebo/placebo, 20; 0.5 mg/kg + 1.0 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, 18; and 2.0 mg/kg + 3.0 mg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, 18.
  • the mean age ofthe patients was 61 years (range 24-88 years), 61% were male.
  • the average duration ofthe anhythmia was 17.8 ⁇ 13 hours in the placebo group, 23.6 ⁇ 22 hours and 24.7 ⁇ 20 hours in the RSD-1 and RSD-2 dosing groups, respectively.
  • Baseline clinical characteristics were similar across groups except that patients in the placebo group tended to more frequently report atrial fibrillation in the past than in the (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride dosed groups.
  • Adverse Events A total of 39 patients experienced 122 adverse events (AEs) over the course ofthe study, with a similar incidence of AEs among the three treatment groups. The majority of AEs were of grade 1 (mild) or grade 2 (moderate) intensity. There were 4 AEs that occurred in 2 patients considered either definitely or probably related to study drug. Both patients were in the RSD-2 dose group: one patient reported paraesthesia, and one patient reported paraesthesia, nausea, and hypotension all of mild intensity. [0309] The most common AEs experienced in this study were cardiac disorders, reported by 7 patients (35.0%) in the Placebo group, 4 patients (22.2%) in the RSD-1 group, and 3 patients (16.7%) in the RSD-2 group.
  • the cardiac disorders in the placebo group included two patients with ventricular tachycardia and a patient with ventricular extrasystoles. Ventricular extrasystoles were also seen in two patients and sinus bradycardia in one patient ofthe low dose group. Ventricular extrasystoles were seen in two patients and sinus bradycardia in another patient in the RSD-2 group. Other common AEs occurring with a similar frequency among treatment groups were nervous system disorders, general disorders, investigations, and infections and infestations. [0310] Serious AEs: Serious AEs were reported in 5 patients (4 patients ofthe Placebo group and 1 patient ofthe RSD-1 group).
  • the cumulative atrial fibrillation termination within 30 minutes of infusion was 61.1% (11 of 18 patients) after 2 + 3 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride infusion (the "RSO-2" group), 11.1% (2 of 18 patients) after 0.5 + 1 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypy ⁇ olidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (the "RSD-1 group”) and 5.3% (1 of 19 patients) after placebo + placebo.
  • the median time to termination of atrial fibrillation was 11 minutes after start ofthe first infusion (range, 3 to 58 minutes) in the RSD-2 group. In fact, all the responders in this group reached primary end-point during drug infusion or within 10 minutes ofthe last infusion. One ofthe 11 responders in this group terminated AF, but went into atrial flutter and subsequently converted to NSR 14.5 hours later.
  • (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride rapidly converted atrial fibrillation patients, often during the infusion phase. There were no serious adverse events associated with (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypy ⁇ olidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride at plasma levels up to 8.6 ⁇ g/ml, and observed SAEs were more common in the placebo group.
  • Example 2 Pharmacokinetic evaluation of oral dosing in human subjects.
  • This prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind, ascending dose study was conducted to assess safety and oral abso ⁇ tion of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in healthy volunteers.
  • Safety and tolerance were monitored through 12-lead ECG, Hotter and telemetry recordings and monitoring of clinical observations, vital signs, clinical chemistries and haematology.
  • the C max in fasted volunteers was 1.8 ⁇ 0.4 ⁇ g/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose and 1.9 ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ g/ml after the 7.5 mg/kg p.o. dose.
  • the C max was 1.3 ⁇ 0.7 ⁇ g/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose.
  • T max time to maximum plasma levels
  • F% bioavailability
  • the oral bioavailability in the three dosing groups were found to be 71 + 21% (mean + s.d.), 69 + 50% and 58 ⁇ 19%, for 5 mg/kg fasted, 5 m/kg fed and 7.5 mg kg fasted respectively, indicating that (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride is rapidly and extensively absorbed after oral administration.
  • This study was a prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind, ascending dose bioavailability study of an orally administered aqueous formulation of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in healthy volunteers. Pharmacokinetic assessment and safety monitoring endpoints were evaluated. All doses were administered as a single oral dosing solution.
  • the study was a prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind ascending single-dose dose assessment ofthe oral bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride. Dose ranging covered two doses (5.0 and 7.5 mg/kg) and involved 24 volunteers. The study was conducted in 3 dosing blocks.
  • Inclusion Criteria Females and males aged 18 between 60 years. Females must be non-pregnant and surgically sterile or free of menses for more than two years. If free of menses females must be using an effective form of birth control during the study (from pre-screening) until three months after the follow-up visit. Methods of birth control considered to be effective would include hormonal contraception (the pill), an intrauterine device (IUD), condoms in combination with a spermicidal cream, total abstinence or sterilization. Males will be advised to refrain from unprotected -..
  • Exclusion Criteria a) 90 mmHg > systolic blood pressure > 160 mmHg, or, 65 mm Hg > diastolic pressure > 95 mmHg. These will be measured 3 times after sitting for 3 minutes and averaged to determine a baseline BP. b) 50 bpm ⁇ pulse rate >90 bpm. c) PR > 0.21 sec, QRS > 0.11 sec, QT C B > 0.430 sec for men and QT C B > 0.450 sec for women. d) Participation in any other investigational drug study within 60 days preceding the start ofthe study, or participation in more than 3 other drug studies (for men) / more than 2 other drug studies (for women) in the past 10 months.
  • Dosing was to be terminated if any volunteer that exhibited any significant clinical signs (e.g. tremors) or if the following limits were reached: PR > 0.24 s; QTcB > 0.500s; Pulse Rate ⁇ 40 bpm; Systolic BP ⁇ 80 mm Hg (confirmed by three measurements over three minutes); Evidence of bundle branch block or other serious conduction disturbance.
  • the subject population included men (63%) and women in the age range of 18 - 60 years. Subject body weight ranged from 59.1 to 89.3 kg. Subjects meeting entry criteria and signing informed consent forms were enrolled in the study. Each subject was assessed clinically pre-dose and underwent clinical and pharmacokinetic evaluation during and after dosing. Each subject enrolled in the study was characterized for cytochrome P450 2D6 expression by genotyping using a blood sample.
  • the study drug was administered in a volume of 150 mL by oral administration. If drug/placebo was administered to fed subjects, then drug/placebo was administered to subjects with a standard breakfast. Subjects remained sitting during drug administration and it was encouraged that they remained sitting for approximately 4 hours post-dose. Telemetry monitoring was conducted from baseline until at least 4 hours post-dose. Vital signs measurements including pulse rate, respiration rate, blood pressure and oxygen saturation were taken at the following timepoints: screening; admission; pre-dose; immediately following dosing; 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration; at follow-up visit; and in the event of an SAE (none occurred).
  • 12-lead ECGs were recorded at the following timepoints: screening; admission; pre-dose; immediately following dosing; 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration; at follow-up visit; and in the event of an SAE (none occuned).
  • ECG's were inte ⁇ reted by a board-certified cardiologist selected by the Sponsor.
  • Baseline and screening 12-lead ECGs were recorded three times consecutively after subject had been sitting for 10 minutes. The ECG recording with the median ofthe three QTcB interval measurements was used as the ECG for that timepoint.
  • Plasma samples for pharmacokinetic analysis were drawn at the following timepoints via venipuncture or sampling cannula into lithium heparin tubes: pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration and in the event of an SAE (none occurred).
  • the oral bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was calculated using the area under the curves (AUCs) after oral administration compared to the AUCs obtained after iv administration in a previously completed study (Phase I trial report).
  • Urine was collected each time the subject voided. After dosing specimens were collected over the periods; 0-4 hours, 4-8 hours and 8 hours - discharge.
  • Hotter monitors were read at a central reading centre. The nature of any adverse event, its time of onset, its duration and severity, action taken, if any, and the investigator's opinion as to whether it was related to the test drag was recorded on the AE Form. Duration ofthe follow up of an adverse event was until recovery from the event was evident, or until the event was judged medically stable or permanent. Subjects were monitored in the study facility until all adverse events resolved. [0332] The study drag showed rapid and extensive abso ⁇ tion after a single oral dose in both fasted and fed subjects (Table 11 and Figure 6). The majority of subjects achieved maximal plasma levels (C ma ) within 30-60 minutes of dosing.
  • the C ma ⁇ in fasted subjects was 1.8 ⁇ 0.4 ⁇ g/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose and 1.3 ⁇ 0.7 ⁇ g/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose in fed subjects .
  • the C m a x in fasted subjects was 1.9 ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ g/ml after the 1.6 mg/kg p.o. dose.
  • Example 3 Pharmacokinetic evaluation offlR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-P (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in dogs.
  • Example 4 Pharmacokinetics of and ion channel modulating compound following single oral administration to male beagle dogs after 7 days of 4 daily doses
  • the pu ⁇ ose of this study was to investigate the pharmacokinetics of DRUG injection following single oral adminisfration to male beagle dogs after 7 days of 4 daily doses.
  • the ion channel modulating compound applied was (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)- Hydroxypy ⁇ olidinyTj-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (C oH 3 ]N0 4 .HCl) (referred to as "drug" in this example).
  • This drug was prepared and diluted according to protocol specifications as follows:
  • Formulation Formulation soup , . n ,. réelle . ,. _ ,. ,, Formulation Preparation Description
  • DRUG injection solution (10 mL) was diluted with 30 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL.
  • Study Day -1 Study Day 1
  • Group 2 DRUG injection solution (16.5 mL) was diluted with 16.5 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL.
  • Group 1 DRUG injection solution (160 mL) was diluted with Study Days 480 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL Study Day 1 2-5
  • Group 2 DRUG injection solution (264 mL) was diluted with 264 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL.
  • Group 1 DRUG injection solution (120 mL) was diluted with 360 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL.
  • Group 2 DRUG injection solution (198 mL) was diluted with 198 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL.
  • Group 1 DRUG injection solution (11.75 mL) was diluted with 35.25 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL.
  • Study Day 8 Study Day 9
  • Group 2 DRUG injection solution (20 mL) was diluted with 20 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL.
  • Dose formulation samples (0.1 mL) were collected from each formulation prior to dosing on Study Days -1, 1, 4, and 8. Dose formulation samples (0.1 mL) were also collected from each formulation following the first dose of each day (Study Days 1, 2, 5, 7, and 8). Samples were used to verify the concenfration ofthe dose applied.
  • Six male beagle dogs were selected from non-naive animals. The animals were assigned to the study based on acceptable health as determined by the attending veterinarian following a pre-study health evaluation. The pre-study health evaluation included a physical exam, serum chemistry and hematology evaluations. The animals were placed into two groups of 3 animals per group. Study animals were fasted overnight prior to dosing for Study Days 1 and 9 only, and food was returned approximately 4 hours post-dose. Fasting was not required on Study Days 2-8 (multiple dosing days).
  • Group 1 animals received a single dose of prepared drug via oral gavage at a target dose level of 5 mg/kg and at a dose volume of 1 mL kg.
  • Group 2 animals received a single dose of prepared drug via oral gavage at a target dose level of 10 mg/kg and at a dose volume of 1 mL/kg.
  • Group 1 and 2 animals received prepared drug 4 times daily (every 6 hours). Immediately following each dose, the gavage tube was flushed with approximately 10 mL of water prior to removal. Dosing proceeded according to protocol and without incident with the following exceptions:
  • This example describes a simulation ofthe pharmacokinetics of an ion channel modulating compound, particularly the pharmacokinetics of different multiple dosing regimes. This simulation is based on parameters extracted from experimental data defining the plasma levels of one example of an ion channel modulating compound as described herein.
  • the pharmacokinetics of a single oral (bolus) dose of 100 mg ofthe drug (approximately 10 mg/kg) maybe calculated.
  • Figure 15 shows a simulation of this single oral dose. Because the data shown is simulated, the pharmacokinetic profile at any time following administration (t) may be determined. Simulation of this data was performed using known methods.
  • FIG. 16 shows the blood plasma concentration (C p in ⁇ g/ml) for eight doses of 100 mg of drug administered every 2 hours.
  • the steady-state trough (C m ⁇ n ) value is achieved by six hours (360 minutes). This trough value is approximately 0.92 ⁇ g/mL when the drag is given at a dose of 100 mg every 2 hours.
  • dosing regimes may vary, including variations in the amount of drug given per dose, the method of dosing (formulation), and the time between doses.
  • a "loading dose” of 500 mg followed by several "maintenance" doses of 100 mg given every two hours is simulated in Figure 17.
  • the initial peak in blood plasma concentration (C ma ⁇ ) is followed by the saw-tooth pattern as the concentration ofthe drug achieves a trough.
  • the trough concentration (C mm ) is approximately 0.92 ⁇ g/ml.
  • Figure 18 shows another example in which the loading dose (first dose) is 150 mg, followed by maintenance dose (subsequent doses) of 100 mg.
  • Drug formulation may also have dramatic effect on tlie pharmacokinetics of ion channel modulating compounds.
  • the release and continuous release formulations described above may be used to simulate plasma levels.
  • the rate constant (dissolution rate constant) for an IR formulation, a 300 mg Hydrophilic formulation, a hydrophobic formulation, and a hot-melt wax formulation were approximated by fitting measured data to a first-order dissolution model. These rate constants are shown in Table 20. As with all of the modeled parameters, approximations ofthe dissolution rate constants could be made using different methods, such as zero-order kinetics.
  • Figure 19 shows the pharmacokinetics of these formulations based on these dissolution rate constants for a single dose.
  • a simulation of a multiple-dosing regime using a 300 mg hydrophilic CR tablet is shown in Figure 20 where maintenance doses are given every eight hours.
  • Figure 21 shows the simulated blood plasma concentration for a loading dose of a 300 mg hydrophilic CR tablet followed by 7 doses of 100 mg every eight hours.
  • the simulations of pharmacokinetics described above are intended only to illustrate the methods, formulations and routes of administration described and claimed herein, and are not intended to limit the methods, formulations and routes of administration to any particular theory or embodiment.

Abstract

Methods, formulations, dosing regimes, and routes of administration for the treatment or prevention of arrhythmias, including the treatment or prevention of atrial fibrillation. In these methods, the disease or condition is treated or prevented by administering one or more ion channel modulating compounds to a subject, where the ion channel modulating compound or compounds produce specific plasma levels in the subject. The ion channel modulating compounds may be cycloalkylamine ether compounds, particularly cyclohexylamine ether compounds.

Description

TITLE: USES OF ION CHANNEL MODULATING COMPOUNDS
RELATED PATENTS AND PATENT APPLICATIONS
[0001] This patent application claims the priority benefit ofthe following patent applications: United States provisional patent application number 60/467,159, titled Antiarrhythmic Drugs, filed May 2, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3002400; United States provisional patent application number 60/516,248, titled Aminocyclohexyl ether compounds and uses thereof, filed October 31, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3000900; United States provisional patent application number 60/516,486, titled Aminocyclohexyl ether compounds and uses thereof, filed October 31, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3000901; United States provisional patent application number 60/493,392, filed Aug. 7, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3000300; United States provisional patent application number 60/526,911, filed Dec. 3, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3001800; United States provisional patent application number 60/527,169, filed Dec. 4, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3001801; United States provisional patent application number 60/558,716, filed Apr. 1, 2004 with attorney docket number 55479-3001900; United States provisional patent application number 60/528,251, titled Uses of Antiarrhythmic Compounds, filed December 8, 2003 with attorney docket number 55479-3001400; United States provisional patent application number 60/544,941, titled Mixed Ion Channel Blockade for Therapeutic Use, filed February 13, 2004 with attorney docket number 55479-3002000; and United States provisional patent application number 60/559,405, titled Formulations and uses of ion channel modulating compounds, filed April 1, 2004 with attorney docket number 55479- 3001500. The contents of each of these patent applications is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0002] The methods and formulations described in this patent relate to the use of ion channel modulating compounds to treat or prevent arrhythmia and other diseases. Specific plasma level concentrations, dosage levels and other characterizations of ion channel modulating compounds used to treat or prevent arrhythmia and other diseases, and in particular atrial fibrillation, are described.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Cardiac arrhythmias often occur as complications to cardiac diseases such as myocardial infarction and heart failure. In serious cases, arrhythmias can cause sudden death. [0004] Atrial flutter and atrial fibrillation are the most commonly sustained cardiac arrhythmias in clinical practice. In this patent we refer to atrial fibrillation as either "atrial fibrillation" or "AF." Currently, the development or exacerbation of AF often prompts emergency department (ED) presentations. The incidence of arrhythmias increases with age, and with the aging population in developed countries, the prevalence is expected to rise substantially over the next several decades. Overall, there are a variety of management strategies for acute atrial fibrillation and the outcomes are generally good; however, catastrophic events can occur as a result of atrial fibrillation such as congestive heart failure, thrombo-embolic phenomenon (particularly strokes), and serious adverse effects associated with treatment.
[0005] Treatment of arrhytmias such as atrial fibrillation is complex and aspects of care, especially the decision to control the ventricular rate vs. convert the arrhythmia, remain controversial. Conversion of atrial fibrillation to sinus rhythm is often attempted in the acute setting to improve symptoms and to prevent the detrimental hemodynamic effects that atrial fibrillation may have in some patients (e.g., valvular disease or left ventricular dysfunction). Early conversion of atrial fibrillation may also prevent the development of electrical remodeling and the embolic risks associated with intra-atrial thrombus formation. Electrical cardioversion is effective in restoring sinus rhythm but requires procedural sedation or anesthesia and is not successful in all cases.
[0006] Currently available converting agents have highly variable efficacy and several safety limitations associated with their use. In addition, placebo-controlled trials that establish the efficacy and safety of these pharmacological therapies for acute conversion are limited. [0007] An efficacious, simple, and safe pharmacological alternative to existing methods of cardioversion would be a welcome development for patients with arrhythmias and their treating physicians. SUMMARY
[0008] Described in this patent are methods, formulations, dosing regimes, and routes of administration for the treatment or prevention of various diseases or conditions, including arrhythmias, and particularly the treatment or prevention of atrial fibrillation. In these methods, the disease or condition is treated or prevented by administering one or more ion channel modulating compounds to a subject, where the ion channel modulating compound or compounds produce specific plasma levels in the subject. Also provided are methods for providing specified plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds in a subject. [0009] Various subjects to which the ion channel compound or compounds may be administered are described in detail in the Detailed Description section. In one version ofthe methods, the subject is a human subject.
[0010] Various formulations, routes of administration, and dosing regimes that may be used are described in detail in the Detailed Description section. In one version ofthe methods, the formulation is an intravenous formulation. In one version ofthe methods, the formulation is an oral formulation. The formulations may include one or more ion channel modulating compounds together with other optional components. The formulations may be administered in a variety of dosing regimes, including administering one or more formulations that may or may not be administered via the same route of administration. The formulations may also be delivered by repeat dosing and by substantially continuous dosing. [0011] Regarding the levels of ion channel modulating compounds produced in the blood plasma by administration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds, the plasma levels may be characterized using a variety of characterizations, including (1) that the characterization that the concentration is above some concentration level for some amount of time, (2) that the Cmax ofthe concentration profile is above some specified level or in some range of levels, (3) that the mean trough value is below some specified level or is in a range of levels, and (4) that the steady state value is below some specified level or is in a range of levels.
[0012] Examples of blood plasma level concentration profiles that may be produced using the methods described in this patent include those in which the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds (1) is greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time; (2) has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml; (3) has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml; (4) has a Cmaχ of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml; (5) is greater that about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; (6) is greater that about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours; (7) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; (8) has a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; (9) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml; (10) has a steady state concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml; (11) has a mean trough concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (12) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (13) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (14) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml; (15) has a steady state concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (16) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml. The total ion channel modulating compound concentration may possess one or more of these characterizations.
[0013] In the methods of treating arrhythmias, including atrial fibrillation, the ion channel modulating compound or compounds are administered to the subject to produce a total ion channel modulating compound concentration that (1) is greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time; (2) has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml; (3) has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg ml; (4) has a Cma of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml; (5) is greater that about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; or (6) is greater that about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours. The total ion channel modulating compound concentration may possess one or more of these characterizations.
[0014] In the methods of preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmias, including atrial fibrillation, the ion channel modulating compound or compounds are administered to the subject to produce a total ion channel modulating compound concentration that (1) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; (2) has a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; (3) has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml; (4) has a steady state concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml; (5) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (6) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (7) has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml; (8) has a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml. The total ion channel modulating compound concentration may possess one or more of these characterizations.
[0015]
[0016]
[0017]
[0018] Various ion channel modulating compounds that may be used in the methods provided in this patent are described in detail in the Detailed Description section. In one version the ion channel modulating compound may be a compound of formula
Figure imgf000006_0001
[0020]
[0021] where R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy. In one version, the ion channel modulating compound is a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000006_0002
[0023] In one version, the ion channel modulating compound is a cycloalkylamine ether compound of formula
Figure imgf000006_0003
[0025]
[0026] where n =1,2,3, or 4 and the other substituents are as defined in the Detailed
Description section. [0027] For all ion channel modulating compounds described above and elsewhere in this patent, isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers ofthe compounds may be used and mixtures ofthe compounds may be used. In addition, solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts ofthe compounds may be used.
[0028] Other aspects ofthe methods provided in this patent are described in detail in the Detailed Description section.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 illustrates a reaction sequence whereby certain aminocyclohexyl ether compounds ofthe present invention may be synthesized. Figure 2 shows the cumulative percentage of dissolution of an intermediate release form ofthe ion channel modulating compound (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride over time. Figure 3 shows a comparison ofthe cumulative percentage of dissolution of different controlled release formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride over time. Figure 4 shows the cumulative percentage of patients terminating atrial fibrillation (AF) after infusions of placebo, 0.5 and 1 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride or 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg (1R3 2R)- 2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, in patients with recent onset atrial fibrillation. Figure 5 shows the plasma concentrations of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after infusion in patients dosed at 2 mg/kg i.v. (filled inverted triangles) and those additionally dosed at 3 mg/kg i.v. (filled circles). Figure 6 shows (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxvpyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma concentrations at various times after IV (10-min infusion) or oral drug administration (solution in orange juice) to normal volunteers (dose 5 mg/kg). Figure 7 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Oral Gavage Administration in Beagle Dogs. Figure 8 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Intraduodenal Administration in Beagle Dogs. Figure 9 shows individual Plasma Concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus Time Following Intracolonic Administration in Beagle Dogs. Figure 10 shows average plasma concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride Versus time following administration in beagle dogs (N=6), all routes compared. Figure 11 shows dose normalized AUCs of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for each route of administration in beagle dogs. Figure 12 shows the plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after a single oral dose in six dog subjects. Figure 13 shows the plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after a single oral dose in six dog subjects following seven days of repeated (4x daily) dosing ofthe drug. Figure 14 shows the trough (Cmin) plasma concentration levels of of (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for six dog subjects given repeated daily dosing ofthe drug. Figure 15 shows a simulation ofthe pharmacokinetics of a 100 mg oral dose. Figure 16 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of 100 mg given orally every two hours. Figure 17 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a loading dose of 500 mg followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every two hours. Figure 18 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a loading dose of 150 mg followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every two hours. Figure 19 shows a simulation of a single oral dose of an immediate release drug formulation, four controlled release formulations: a hydrophilic drug formulaion, a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation, a hydrophobic drug formulation, and a hot-melt wax drug formulation. Figure 20 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime of a a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation given orally every eight hours. Figure 21 shows a simulated pharmacokinetic profile for a multiple dosing regime in which a loading dose of a 300 mg hydrophilic drug formulation is followed by a maintence dose of 100 mg given orally every eight hours.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0029] Described in this patent are methods, formulations and routes of administration for achieving a blood plasma level of an ion channel modulating compound in a subject. Also described in this patent are methods, formulations and routes of administration for treating a subject suffering from arrhythmia by achieving a blood plasma level. Also described are methods, formulations, and routes of administration for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a subject by achieving a blood plasma level.
[0030] Atrial fibrillation is one type of arrhythmia specificially referred to throughout this description. However the methods, formulations and routes of administration described herein are not limited to atrial fibrillation, and may be used to treat, prevent and/or postpone the onset of any arrhythmia, including but not limited to: ventricular arrhythmias (e.g., ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, premature ventricular contractions), supraventricular arrhythmias (e.g., supraventricular tachycardia, atrial fibrillation, Wolff- Parkinson- White Syndrome, atrial flutter, premature supraventricular contractions), heart block, Long Q-T Syndrome, and sick sinus syndrome. It is also believed that the formulations and routes of administration described in this patent may be used to treat other diseases, which are described in this Detailed Description section. [0031] Generally, the subject in which arrhythmia or other diseases may be treated or prevented is any mammal. In one version the subject is a human subject. In one version the subject is any domestic animal, including but not limited to dogs, and cats. In one version, the subject is any livestock animal, including but not limited to pigs, horses, cows and sheep. In one version, the subject is any zoo animal, including but not limited to: Bengel tigers, camels and giraffes.
[0032] In this Detailed Description, we first describe methods for treating arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) and formulations and routes of administration that may be used in these methods. We then describe methods for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia and formulations and routes of administration that may be used in these methods. We then describe useful plasma levels and other diseases that it is believed may be treated using these plasma levels. We also describe specific compounds and general classes of compounds, and general formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used in the methods described in this patent. We also present examples demonstrating the methods described in this patent.
METHODS AND FORMULATIONS FOR TREATING ARRYTHMIA
[0033] In the treatment methods described in this section, a subject suffering from arrhythmia, including but not limited to atrial fibrillation, is treated by administering to the subject a formulation containing one or more ion channel modulating compounds. The formulation may optionally contain one or more additional components.
[0034] As used in this patent, unless the context makes clear.otherwise, "treatment," and similar word such as "treated," "treating" etc, is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including and preferably clinical results. In the context of treatment of arrhythmia, treatment preferably means termination of arrhythmia. Treatment may also mean a return to normal sinus rhytlim for the subject suffering from arrhythmia. Treatment may also mean a lessening ofthe severity ofthe arrhythmia. Treatement may include the use ofthe methods, formulations and routes of administration described herein in conjunction with other therapies, for example, electrical cardioversion.
[0035] In one version, the arrhythmia treated is atrial fibrillation.
[0036] Generally, the subject in which arrhythmia may be treated is any mammal. In one version, the subject is a human subject. In other versions the subject is a domestic animal, including but not limited to dogs and cats; or a farm animal, including but not limited to...
Ion Channel Modulation Compounds That May Be Used In the Methods of Treating Arrhythmia
[0037] Generally, any ion channel modulating compound capable of treating arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) may be used in the methods and formulations described in this section. Specific ion channel modulating compounds that may be used are described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent, and generally any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in that section may be used.
[0038] In one version ofthe methods and formulations described in this section, the ion channel modulating compound is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
Formulations and Routes of Administration That May Be Used In the Methods of Treating Arrhythmia
[0039] Generally, the formulation used for treating arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) in the methods described in this patent can be a pure ion channel modulating compound, a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds, a pure ion channel modulating compound formulated with one or more additional components, or a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds formulated with one or more additional components. The ion channel modulating compound or compounds may generally be any ofthe compounds as described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent. [0040] Generally, any formulation, route of administration, and dosage form capable of being used in the methods for treating arrhythmia described in this patent may be used. General formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used are described in the Formulations, Routes of Administration, and Dosage Forms section in the patent. Specific nonlimiting examples of formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used for treating arrhythmia using the methods described in this patent are described in more detail below in this section. [0041] In one nonlimiting example, the formulation is an oral dosage formulation or an intravenous dosage formulation. An example of a formulation that may be used for treating arrhythmia is an intra-venous formulation of one or more ion channel modulating compound in a pharmaceutically acceptable solution. The one or more ion channel modulating compound may generally be any ion channel modulating compound described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent. A specific example of an ion channel modulating compound that maybe used is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
[0042] One specific example of a formulation that may be used to treat arrhythmia by intravenous administration is a 20 mg/ml (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride isotonic intravenous solution in 40 mM sodium Citrate, pH 5.5. Other preferred formulations include immediate (fast or "flash") release oral, sublingual, nasal, and inhaled formulations.
Amounts of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds and Dosing Regimes for Methods of
Treating Arrhythmia
[0043] Generally, the formulation used for treatment of arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) will contain an amount ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds such that administration of a dose ofthe formulation containing a therapeutically effective amount of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds will treat the arrhythmia in the subject.
[0044] As used in this section, a "therapeutically effective amount" ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds is that amount sufficient to effect the desired treatment of arrhythmia in the subject to which the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are administered.
[0045] The formulation containing the therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be administered in repeated doses. When administered as repeated doses, each individual does may or may not deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds but the cumulative effect ofthe repeated doses will deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
[0046] In one example for treating a human subject, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds to the subject. In another version, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. As used in this patent, "mg/kg" means the amount of ion channel modulating compound or compounds per kg body weight of the subject. For example, but without limitation, to administer 0.1 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound to a subject of mass 50 kg the administered dose contains 5mg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
[0047] In other versions, the formulation is delivered by repeat dosing where a first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and a second dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds. These first two doses may optionally be followed by one or more subsequent doses. In other versions, the first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and 5.0 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds; or the first dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg of ion channel modulating compound or compounds.
[0048] In the above repeated dosing examples the time between repeated dosing may generally be any time such that the repeated dosing delivers a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds. In one example, the time between repeated doses may be between about 5 minutes and about 1 hour, or in another version between about 15 minutes and about 45 minutes. In one verision repeated doses of between about 0.01 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg are delivered per hour for up to 36 hours. [0049] Generally, repeated doses do not have to be administered via the same route of administration. For example, a first dose may be administered intravenously followed by a second dose administered orally. In addition, a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by administering more than one formulation at the same time. As a nonlimiting example, a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by simultaneous or near simultaneous administration of both oral and intravenous formulations. Plasma Levels of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds in Methods of Treating Arrhythmias
[0050] Generally the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds present in the subject blood plasma after administration will be at a level sufficient to effect the required treatment ofthe subject's arrhythmia.
[0051] As used in this patent, unless the context makes it clear otherwise, the blood plasma level is the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds in the blood plasma ofthe subject.
[0052] In one example in the treatment of a subject, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a Cmax of at least 0.1 μg/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses ofthe formulation.
[0053] In another version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses. In one version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml during and/or following administration of one or more doses.
[0054] In one example in the treatment of a subject, the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 1 μg/ml for a time of about 2 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose of formulation. In another version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 0.1 μg/ml for a time of about 10 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose ofthe formulation. In one nonlimiting example, these blood plasma levels are maintained by administering two or more repeated doses ofthe specific intravenous formulation described above in this section.
METHODS AND FORMULATIONS FOR PREVENTING OR POSTPONING ONSET OF
ARRHYTHMIA
[0055] In the prevention or postponement of onset of arrhythmia methods described in this section, a formulation containing one or more ion channel modulating compounds is administered to a subject to prevent or postpone onset of arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) in the subject. Prevention and postponement of onset include prevention and postponement of onset of recurrence of arrhythmia; that is, the prevention or postponent of onset of arrhythmia in a subject that has previously undergone one or more arrhythmias. The formulation may optionally contain one or more additional components.
[0056] As used in this patent, unless the context makes clear otherwise, "prevention," and similar word such as "prevented," "preventing" etc, is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including and preferably clinical results. In the context of prevention of arrhythmia, prevention preferably means stopping the occurrence of arrhythmia. Prevention may also include not only an absolute stopping ofthe occurrence of arrhythmia but may also include a lessening ofthe severity of arrhythmia if it does occur. The methods described in this section may also be used to postpone the time for onset of arrhythmia if it does occur. The methods described in this section may also be used to lessen the probability that the subject will suffer from arrhythmia.
[0057] In one version the arrhythmia to be prevented is atrial fibrillation. [0058] Generally, the subject in which arrhythmia may be prevented or for which onset may be postponed is any mammal. In one version, the subject is a human subject. In one version, the subject is any domesic animal, including, but not limited to cats, dogs, etc. In one version, the subject is any farm animal, inlcluding, but not limited to pigs, cows, horses, etc..
Ion Channel Modulation Compounds That May Be Used In The Methods of Preventing or Postponing Onset of Arrhythmia
[0059] Generally, any ion channel modulating compound capable of preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation) may be used in the methods and formulations described in this section. Specific ion channel modulating compounds that may be used are described in the Ion Channel Modulating section of this patent, and generally any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in that section may be used. [0060] In one version ofthe methods and formulations described in this section, the ion channel modulating compound is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
Formulations and Routes of Administration That May Be Used In The Methods of Preventing or postponing onset of Arrhythmia [0061] Generally, the formulation used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia in the methods described in this patent can be a pure ion channel modulating compound, a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds, a pure ion channel modulating compound formulated with one or more additional components, or a mixture of one or more ion channel modulating compounds formulated with one or more additional components. The ion channel modulating compound or compounds may generally be any ofthe compounds as described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent. [0062] Generally, any formulation, route of administration, and dosage form capable of being used in the methods for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia described in this patent maybe used. General formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that maybe used are described in the Formulations, Routes of Administration, and Dosage Forms section in the patent. Specific nonlimiting examples of formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia using the methods described in this patent are described in more detail below in this section. In one nonlimiting example, the formulation is an oral dosage formulation. [0063] An example of a formulation that may be used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia is an oral dosage formulation of one or more ion channel modulating compound. The oral dosage formulation may be a solid formulation or may be a liquid formulation. The one or more ion channel modulating compound may generally be any ion channel modulating compound described in the Ion Channel Modulating Compounds section of this patent. A specific example of an ion channel modulating compound that may be used is (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride. [0064] One specific example of a formulation that may be used to prevent or postpone onset arrhythmia by oral administration is a controlled release (CR) formulation, described below.
Amounts of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds and Dosing Regimes for Methods of Preventing or Postponing Onset of Arrhythmia
[0065] Generally, the formulation used for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia will contain an amount ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds such that administration of a dose ofthe formulation containing a therapeutically effective amount of the ion channel modulating compoμnd or compounds will prevent or postpone onset ofthe arrhythmia in the subject. As used in this section, a "therapeutically effective amount" ofthe one or more ion channel modulating compounds is that amount sufficient to effect the desired prevention or postponement of onset of arrhythmia in the subject to which the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are administered.
[0066] The formulation containing the therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be administered in repeated doses. When administered as repeated doses, each individual does may or may not deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds but the cumulative effect ofthe repeated doses will deliver a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
[0067] In one example for preventing or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a human subject, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 50 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds to the subject. In another version, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 20 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. In another version, the formulation is administered in a dose delivering between about 5.0 mg/kg and about 20 mg/kg per day ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds.
[0068] In other versions, the formulation is delivered by repeat dosing where a first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds and a second dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. These first two doses may optionally be followed by one or more subsequent doses. In other versions, the first dose delivers between about 0.1 mg/kg and 5.0 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 0.5 mg/kg and about 10 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds; or the first dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 3 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds and the second dose delivers between about 1.0 mg/kg and about 5 mg/kg ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds or compounds. [0069] In the above repeated dosing examples the time between repeated dosing may generally be any time such that the repeated dosing delivers a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds. In one example, the time between repeated doses may be between about 5 minutes and about seven days, or in another version between about 1 hour and about 24 hours. In one version, the time between repeated doses is between about 4 hours and about every seven days, or in another version between about 8 horus and 24 hours. In one version the time between doses is about 12 hours. [0070] Generally, repeated doses do not have to be administered via the same route of administration. For example, a first dose may be administered orally followed by a second dose administered intravenously. In addition, a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by administering more than one formulation at the same time. As a nonlimiting example, a therapeutically effective amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be delivered by simultaneous or near simultaneous administration of both oral and intravenous formulations.
Plasma Levels of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds in Methods of Preventing or postponing onset of Arrhythmia
[0071] Generally the concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds present in the subject blood plasma after administration will be at a level sufficient to effect the required prevention or postponement of onset ofthe subject's arrhythmia (e.g. atrial fibrillation).
[0072] In one example in the prevention or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a subject, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a Cmax of at least 50 ng/ml following administration of one or more doses ofthe formulation. In another version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a Cmax of between about 50 ng/ml and about 50μg/ml following administration of one or more doses. In other versions, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration of one or more doses has a Cmax of between about 50 ng/ml and about 30μg/ml; or between about 50 ng/ml and about 20μg/ml; or between about 50 ng/ml and about 1 Oμg/ml; or between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml; or between about 1 Oμg/ml and about 50μg/ml; or between about 20μg/ml and about 50μg/ml; or between about 3 Oμg/ml and about 50μg/ml. [0073] In one example in the prevention or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a subject, the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is at least about 0.1 μg/ml for a time of about 3 hours during and/or following the administration ofthe first dose of formulation. In one nonlimiting example, these blood plasma levels are maintained by administering one or more repeated doses ofthe oral formulation described above in this section.
[0074] In one example in the prevention or postponing onset of arrhythmia in a subject, the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds has a mean trough value of between about 50 ng/ml and about 30μg/ml. In another version, the mean trough value is between about 50 ng/ml and about 20μg/ml. In another version, the mean trough value is between about 50 ng/ml and about 1 Oμg/ml. In another version, the mean trough value is between about 1 ng/ml to 10 μg/ml. In another version, the mean trough value is between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml. As used herein, unless the context makes clear otherwise, the mean trough value is the average ofthe trough values for the blood plasma levels ofthe ion channel modulating compounds during a course of dosing; where the trough value is the lowest concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma immediately before a subsequent dose ofthe ion channel modulating compound. For example, but without limitation, the mean trough value for the course of closing illustrated in Figure 18 is the average ofthe seven local minimum values ofthe blood plasma levels immediately preceeding doses two through eight ofthe ion channel modulating compounds.
[0075] In one version ofthe methods of treatment or methods of prevention, it may be possible to provide blood plasma levels by a continuous or substantially continuous delivery ofthe ion channel modulating compounds. In this situation, the characterization ofthe total concentration of ion channels modulating compounds by the mean trough levels is ambiguous since there are not a discrete number of doses with concomitant trough levels immediately preceding each dose. Instead, the continuous or substantially continuous delivery of ion channel modulating compound will provide, after some initial time, a steady state concentration of ion channel modulating compound or compounds. In this situation, the ranges of mean trough valves described for the multiple dosing regime is replaced by ranges for the steady state concentration. For example, in one version the steady state concentration is less than about 20μg/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is less than about 10 μg/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is between 1 ng ml and 10 μg/ml. In another version, the steady state concentration is between 0.3 μg/ml and 3 μg/ml.
RATES AND MECHANISM FOR ABSORPTION OF ION CHANNEL MODULATING COMPOUNDS
[0076] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent, the ion channel modulating compound or compounds that are administered to a subject have a rate of absorption that is substantially independent ofthe site or route of administration. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a subject orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the duodenum ofthe subject. In one version, the rate of absoφtion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a subject orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the colon ofthe subject. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog is substantially independent ofthe site or route of administration. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the duodenum ofthe dog. In one version, the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to a dog orally is approximately equivalent to the rate of absorption ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered in the colon ofthe dog. [0077] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent, following administration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds to a subject, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is substantially independent ofthe route of administration. In one version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following oral administration to the subject is substantially equivalent to the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration to the subject's colon. In one version, the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following oral administration to the subject is substantially equivalent to the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds following administration to the subject's duodenum. In one version the subject is a dog.
[0078] As used herein, unless the context makes it clear otherwise, the rate of absoφtion of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds may be measured by the blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds over time. In one version, the rate of absoφtion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is measured by the area under the curve (AOC) ofthe blood plasma level ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds over time. In one version, the rate of absoφtion ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds is measured by the peak blood plasma level (Cmax) of the ion channel modulating compound or compounds and the time after administration that the peak blood plasma level occurs (Tma3C).
[0079] As used in this patent, unless the context makes it clear otherwise, a second rate of absoφtion is substantially equivalent to a first rate of absoφtion if the value ofthe second rate of absoφtion is within about twenty percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of absoφtion, or within about ten percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of absoφtion, or within about five percent ofthe value ofthe first rate of absoφtion. As used in this patent, unless the context makes it clear otherwise, a second blood plasma level is substantially equivalent to a first blood plasma level if the value ofthe second blood plasma level is within about twenty percent ofthe value ofthe first blood plasma level, or within about ten percent ofthe value of the first blood plasma level, or within about five percent ofthe value ofthe first blood plasma level.
METHODS FOR PRODUCING BLOOD PLASMA LEVELS OF ION CHANNEL MODULATING COMPOUNDS
[0080] Generally, described in this section are specific useful blood plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds and methods of producing the levels. As described in the section above, the blood plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds may be used to treat or prevent arrythmias including atrial fibrillation. However, it is also believed that the blood plasma levels of ion channel modulating compounds may be used to treat or prevent other diseases. Examples of diseases which it is believed may be teated are described in this section.
[0081] Useful blood plasma levels in a subject of ion channel modulating compounds in a subject include: (l)greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time; (2)Cmax greater than about 0.1 μg/ml; (3)Cmax between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml; (4)Cmax between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml; (5)greater that about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours; (6)greater that about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time at least about 2 hours; (7)mean trough less than about 20 μg/ml; (8)steady state concentration less than about 20 μg/ml; (9)mean trough less than about 10 μg/ml; (lθ)steady state concentration less than about 10 μg/ml; (1 l)mean trough concentration between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (12) mean trough concentration between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (13)steady state concentration between about 0.3μg/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (14)mean trough concentration between about 0.3μgml and about 3 μg/ml; (15)steady state concentration between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml; (16)steady state concentration between about 0.3μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml.
[0082] The above blood plasma levels are useful when provided in a human subject. The above blood plasma levels are also useful when provided in a dog or pig subject. It is believed that the above blood plasma levels may also be useful when produced in other subjects such as those described elsewhere in this patent.
[0083] The blood plasma levels described in this section may be produced in a subject by administering to the subject one or more channel modulating compounds in an amount sufficient to produce the blood plasma levels described.
[0084] Generally, any formulations, routes of administration, and closing regimes capable of producing the blood plasma levels may be used. General examples of formulations routes of administration and dosages that may be used are described in the Formulations, Routes of Administration and Dosage section. Specific, nonlimiting formulations, routes of administration and dosage regimes that may be used to produce the blood plasma levels are described in the examples and in the method of treating and method of preventing sections above. With this information, together with their knowledge ofthe field, someone with knowledge of drug delievery technologies will be able to straightforwardly produce the described blood plasma levels in a subject. i [0085] As shown elsewhere in this patent, the blood plasma levels described in this section may be used to treat or prevent arrythmias, including but not limited to atrial fibrillation. It is also believed that the ion channel modulating compounds at the blood plasma levels described may also be used to treat or prevent other diseases including at least the following diseases and conditions: disease ofthe central nervous system (CNS disorders), Lou Gehrig's disease (Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis), Alzheimer, ATDS-related dementia, Multiple Sclerosis (MS), convulsion, seizures, epileptic spasms, depression, insomnia, anxiety, schizoplirenia, Parkinson's disease, trigeminal pain, phantom limb pain, back pain, smoke cessation, respiratory disorders, cystic fibrosis, asthma, cough, inflammation and inflammatory disorders, irritable bowel disorders, irritable bowel syndrome Crohn's disease, prostatic hypeφlasia, insect bites, psoriasis, arthritis, allergies, gastrointestinal disorders, urinary incontinence, cardio-vascular disorders, arrhythmia, heart failure, hypotension, cerebral or myocardial ischemias, hypertension, long-QT syndrome, stroke, migraine, ophthalmic diseases, diabetes mellitus, myopathies, Becker's myotonia, myasthenia gravis, paramyotonia congentia, malignant hyperthermia, hyperkalemic periodic paralysis, Thomsen's myotonia, autoimmune disorders, graft rejection in organ transplantation or bone marrow transplantation, alopecia, diseases or dysfunctions of ion channels and receptors, diseases of voltage-gated ion channels, paralysis. This list is illustrative ofthe kinds of disorders for which the present invention could be used, and is not intended to be either limiting or exhaustive.
[0086] The methods and formulations described herein may be used for at least the following treatments: antitoxin, anti-venom, antiviral, antibiotic, antiparasitic, antineoplastic, antinociceptive, sedative, anesthetic, analgesic, painkiller, painkiller, antipsychotic, local anaesthetic, topical anesthetic, antiangiogenic, cardioplegia, cardioprotectant. [0087] For certain ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in this patent application, the unique combination of activity with affect on the atria and devoid of or substantially devoid of similar effects on the ventricle leads to the development of an agent that may be used for the treatment and/or prevention of electrical rhythm disturbances in the atria without subsequent effects on the electrical activity in the ventricle. [0088] The methods and ion channel modulating compounds described in this patent application are proposed for use in diseases and conditions including without limitation the management of atrial fibrillation, flutter and other supraventricular rhythm disturbance without adverse effects or substantial adverse effects on the electrical activity and rhythm of the ventricles.
[0089] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases and conditions including without limitation a host of supraventicular rhythm disturbances whilst not affecting or substantially affecting the ventricles and being a safer agent for patients with impaired LV function and useful for managing rate and rhythm disturbances in acute MI and CHF.
[0090] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions by modulating the late sodium current. The late sodium current may also be referred to as the persistent sodium current. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose diseases or conditions in which the late sodium current is enhanced. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose diseases or conditions in which the late sodium current is enhanced in skeletal muscle. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose congenital myotonia.
[0091] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent acute rhythm disturbances in the heart under pathological conditions (i.e. acute ischemia) in which normal electrophysiology ofthe heart is altered and under which Iκr is of minimal importance and repolarization time course is dominated by Ito and/or lkur. In one embodiment, acute rhythm disturbances in the heart resulting from slowing conduction (e.g reentrant arrhythmia under acute ischemia or other disease state) can be treated or prevented by reducing risks associated with alteration in cardiac rhythm. In one method described in this patent application, a therapeutically effective amount of a composition effective to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose acute rhytlim disturbances in the heart under pathological conditions is given to a patient in need thereof. [0092] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders in the ischemic heart where such rhythm disturbances are mediated by prolonging refractoriness mediated by I ur and It0 thusly prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization. [0093] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders ofthe heart by inhibiting sodium currents of excitation and prolonging refractoriness mediated by I ur and Ito. In one method described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose rhythm disturbances by affecting abnormal conduction and prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization. [0094] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disturbances by inhibiting sodium currents of excitation, inhibiting inward Na current associated with the plateau ofthe cardiac action potential (i.e. late window current) and prolonging refractoriness mediated by I ur and It0. In one method described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose rhytlim disturbances by affecting abnormal conduction and prolonging the voltage time course of repolarization. -Λ
[0095] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent rhythm disorders in patients in need thereof wherem the ion channel modulating compound is used in conjunction with devices (i.e. pacemakers or implantable defibrillators) to facilitate the patients response to the device to restore normal rhythm and that are used to manage patients with rhythm disturbances.
[0096] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent the early return of atrial fibrillation following electrical cardioversion. In one method described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent and/or diagnose the early return of atrial fibrillation following electrical cardioversion to improve the ease of cardioversion in patients requiring transthroacic or internal cardioversion to restore normal rhythm. [0097] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve atrial contractility and/or to treat and/or prevent blood stasis via electrical stunning following a cardiac procedure. Examples of cardiac procedures include but are not limited to the maze procedure , surgery or cardiac bypasss, or any other procedure in which the atria are stunned precluding effective mechanical function leading to blood statsis, clotting, and potential of thromobosis. [0098] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to diagnose, treat and/or prevent electrical abnormalities ofthe heart in patients suffering from impaired electrical conduction ofthe heart.
[0099] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to diagnose, treat and/or prevent contractile dysfunction and/or stunning ofthe atria. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to reduce thrombosis, cardiac and cerebral ischemia due to atrial dyskenesis and clot formation in patients suffering from impaired electrical and mechanical function ofthe heart. [00100] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or diagnose vasoconstriction. In one version of tlie methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasoconstriction in patients with reduced blood flow based upon inhibition of It0 and I ur- In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasoconstriction by improving blood flood to selected organs and tissues. [00101] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent vasospasm. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve respiratory function based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of It0 and I ur resulting in improvements in airway flow. [00102] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent smooth muscle spasm. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve renal function and urinary flow based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of It0 and Ikur resulting in improvements in urine flow. In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve gall bladder function and bile flow based upon relaxation of smooth muscle mediated by blockade of It0 and I Ur. [00103] In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions which are mediated by inhibiting sodium currents and potassium currents. In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions which are mediated by inliibiting sodium currents and potassium currents by inhibiting sodium channels and I ur and/or Ito. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to improve smooth muscle contractile function in body structures associated with physiological processes. Example of such physiological processes include but are not limited to the passage of fluids and material through the body in the gut, urinary, respiratory or circulatory system for the reduction in blood pressure , intraocular pressure, humoral flow associated with glaucoma.
[00104] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion ; channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of the blood. In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions ofthe blood by modifying Ikur or It0. Examples of diseases or conditions ofthe blood include but are not limited to sickle cell anemia and abnormal leukocyte or lymphochyte function (e.g. abnormal leukocyte or lymphochyte function associated with limiting an inflammation and/or immune response, particularly those mediated by changes in I ur or It0). [00105] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of low flow ischemia, shock and/or reperfusion injury. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to treat and/or prevent diseases or conditions of low flow ischemia, shock and or reperfusion injury by inhibiting sodium currents and potassium currents mediated by Ikur and It0. [00106] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is provided as an enzyme modulator. Enzyme that may be modulated (inhibited or activated) may include but are not limited to lactate dehydrogenase (LDH); kinases such as map kinases and other kinases; transaminase; ATPase; xanthine oxidase; and Cytochrome oxidase.
[00107] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is provided as an anti-helminthic or vermifuge, i.e. de- worming medication for human or other mammals.
[00108] In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm in the normal heart. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is administered to influence heart rate or rhythm in the diseased heart. [00109] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool, hi one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool by modulating It0 and Ikur and IN3. hi one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool based on its association with the protein or molecules mediating It0 and I ur and INa. In one version of the methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a ligand or affinity probe for proteins or molecules (i.e. ion channels). In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to create antibodies.
[00110] In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify cellular or subcellular processes associated with cardiac function. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify receptor function and/or signal transduction. In one version ofthe methods described in this patent application an ion channel modulating compound is used as a research tool or diagnostic tool to identify mechanisms associated with disease of the body (such as cardiac disorders).
IONCHANNELMODULATINGCOMPOUNDS
[00111] In this section are described various compounds and classes of compounds that may be used as ion channel modulating compounds in the methods, formulations, etc. described in this patent.
[00112] In this section are first described a series of specific classes of ion channel modulating compounds together with specific example compounds, followed by a general description of compounds that may be used as ion channel modulating compounds.
Specific Classes of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds and Exemplary Ion Channel Modulating Compounds
[00113] Examples of specific classes of ion channel modulating compounds and exemplary ion channel modulating compounds are described below and in U.S. provisional patent application number 60/516,248, U.S. patent application number 10/674,684, and U.S. patent application number 09/913,373, each of which applications is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.
[00114] In the variations described in this section on Specific Classes of Ion Channel
Modulating Compounds and Exemplary Ion Channel Modulating Compounds, all enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms ofthe ion channel modulating compounds are intended. Pure stereoisomers, mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers, and mixtures of different ion channel modulating compounds are described. Thus, the,ion channel modulating compounds may occur as racemates, racemic mixtures and as individual diastereomers, or enantiomers with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention. A racemate or racemic mixture does not imply a 50:50 mixture of stereoisomers. Where a given structural formula or chemical name is presented for a compound it is intended that all possible solvates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, amides, complexes, chelates, stereoisomers, geometric isomers, crystalline or amoφhous forms, metabolites, metablic precursors or prodrugs ofthe compound are also separately described by the chemical structural formula or chemical name.
[00115] As used in this patent, unless the context make plain otherwise, the following terms are defined to have following meanings: "Acid addition salts" refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties ofthe free bases and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid and the like, or organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, malonic acid, succmic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, -toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid and the like.
[00116] "Acyl" refers to branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragments terminated by a carbonyl -(C=0)- group containing the specified number of carbon atoms. Examples include acetyl [CH3C=0-, a C2acyl] and propionyl [CH3CH2C=0-, a C3acyl].
[00117] "Alkanoyloxy" refers to an ester substituent wherem the ether oxygen is the point of attachment to the molecule. Examples include propanoyloxy [(CH3CH2C=0-0-, a
C3alkanoyloxy] and ethanoyloxy [CH3C=0-0-, a C2alkanoyloxy].
[00118] "Alkoxy" refers to an O-atom substituted by an alkyl group, for example, methoxy [-OCH3, a Cialkoxy}.
[00119] "Alkoxyalkyl" refers to a alkylene group substituted with an alkoxy group.
For example, methoxyethyl [CH OCH CH2-] and ethoxymethyl (CH3CH2OCH2-] are both
C3alkoxyalkyl groups.
[00120] "Alkoxycarbonyl" refers to an ester substituent wherein the carbonyl carbon is the point of attachment to the molecule. Examples include ethoxycarbonyl [CH3CH2OC=0-, a C3alkoxycarbonyl] and methoxycarbonyl [CH3OC=O-, a C2alkoxycarbonyl].
[00121] "Alkyl" refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment containing the specified number of carbon atoms and having one point of attachment. Examples include
72-propyl (a C3alkyl), tso-propyl (also a C3alkyl), and t-butyl (a C4alkyl).
[00122] "Alkylene" refers to a divalent radical which is a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment containing the specified number of carbon atoms, and having two points of attachment. An example is propylene [-CH2CH2CH2-, a C3 alkylene].
[00123] "Alkylcarboxy" refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment terminated by a carboxylic acid group [-COOH]. Examples include carboxymethyl
[HOOC-CH2-, a C2alkylcarboxy] and carboxyethyl [HOOC-CH2CH2-, a C3alkylcarboxy].
[00124] "Aryl" refers to aromatic groups which have at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes carbocyclic aryl, heterocyclic aryl (also known as heteroaryl groups) and biaryl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted. Carbocyclic aryl groups are generally preferred in the compounds ofthe present invention, where phenyl and naphthyl groups are preferred carbocyclic aryl groups.
[00125] "Aralkyl" refers to an alkylene group wherein one ofthe points of attachment is to an aryl group. An example of an aralkyl group is the benzyl group [C6H5CH2-, a
C7aralkyl group].
[00126] "Cycloalkyl" refers to a ring, which may be saturated or unsaturated and monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic formed entirely from carbon atoms. An example of a cycloalkyl group is the cyclopentenyl group (C5H7-), which is a five carbon (C5) unsaturated cycloalkyl group.
[00127] "Carbocyclic" refers to a ring which may be either an aryl ring or a cycloalkyl ring, both as defined above.
[00128] "Carbocyclic aryl" refers to aromatic groups wherein the atoms which form the aromatic ring are carbon atoms. Carbocyclic aryl groups include monocyclic carbocyclic aryl groups such as phenyl, and bicyclic carbocyclic aryl groups such as naphthyl, all of which may be optionally substituted.
[00129] "Heteroatom" refers to a non-carbon atom, where boron, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are preferred heteroatoms, with nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur being particularly preferred heteroatoms in the compounds ofthe present invention.
[00130] "Heteroaryl" refers to aryl groups having from 1 to 9 carbon atoms and the remainder ofthe atoms are heteroatoms, and includes those heterocyclic systems described in
"Handbook of Chemistry and Physics," 49th edition, 1968, R.C. Weast, editor; The Chemical
Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH. See particularly Section C, Rules for Naming Organic
Compounds, B. Fundamental Heterocyclic Systems. Suitable heteroaryls include furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazinyl, imidazolyl, and the like.
[00131] "Hydroxyalkyl" refers to a branched or unbranched hydrocarbon fragment bearing an hydroxy (-OH) group. Examples include hydroxyrnethyl (-CH2OH, a Cihydroxyalkyl) and 1-hydroxyethyl (-CHOHCH3, a C2hydroxyalkyl). [00132] "Thioalkyl" refers to a sulfur atom substituted by an alkyl group, for example thio ethyl (CH3S-, a Cithioalkyl).
[00133] "Modulating" in connection with the activity of an ion channel means that the activity ofthe ion channel may be either increased or decreased in response to administration of a compound or composition or method ofthe present invention. Thus, the ion channel may be activated, so as to transport more ions, or may be blocked, so that fewer or no ions are transported by the channel.
[00134] "Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers" for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remingtons Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A.R. Gennaro edit. 1985). For example, sterile saline and phosphate-buffered saline at physiological pH maybe used. Preservatives, stabilizers, dyes and even flavoring agents may be provided in the pharmaceutical composition. For example, sodium benzoate, sorbic acid and esters of j?-hydroxybenzoic acid may be added as preservatives. IcL at 1449. In addition, antioxidants and suspending agents may be used. Id [00135] "Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to salts ofthe compounds ofthe present invention derived from the combination of such compounds and an organic or inorganic acid (acid addition salts) or an organic or inorganic base (base addition salts). The compounds ofthe present invention maybe used in either the free base or salt forms, with both forms being considered as being within the scope ofthe present invention.
Aminocyclohexyl Ether Ion Channel Modulating Compounds [00136] One class of compounds that are ion channel modulating compounds are compounds that comprise an aminocyclohexyl ether core structure having an ether oxygen atom at position 1 of a cyclohexane ring, and an amine nitrogen atom at position 2 ofthe cyclohexane ring. This core structure is shown below, with other positions numbered in corresponding order:
Figure imgf000033_0001
[00137] The bonds from the cyclohexane ring of A to the 1 -oxygen and 2-nitrogen atoms in the above formula may be relatively disposed in either a cis or trans relationship. In one variation, the stereochemistry ofthe amine and ether substituents ofthe cyclohexane ring is either (R,K)-trans or (S,S)-trans. m another variation, the stereochemistry at these positions is either (R5S)-c/,s or (S,R)-cis.
[00138] In one version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula:
Figure imgf000033_0002
CD
[00139] Compounds of formula (I) are aminocyclohexyl ethers. More specifically, these aminocyclohexyl ethers are substituted at position 2 ofthe cyclohexyl ring with an amine group -NRιR2. The cyclohexyl ring may also be substituted with additional substituents (designated as R3 and R ) as described in more detail below. Examples of specific compounds represented by formula (I) are described below. [00140] Depending upon the selection of substituents Ri and R2, the compounds of formula (I) may be primary, secondary, or tertiary amines (i.e., both R! and R2 are hydrogen, only one of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, or neither of Ri and R2 are hydrogen, respectively). In one embodiment ofthe invention, the compounds of formula (I) are tertiary amines, i.e., neither Ri nor R2 is hydrogen. Where the amine is tertiary, it may be a cyclic amine. Amine substituents Ri and R2 may be independently selected from substituents which include hydrogen, alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms (i.e., Cι-C8alkyl), alkoxyalkyl groups containing from three to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C3-C8alkoxyalkyl), alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms where one ofthe carbon atoms is substituted with a hydroxyl group (i.e., Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl), and aralkyl groups containing from seven to twelve carbon atoms (i.e., C7-Cι2aralkyl). In one version, Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C8alkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl. In another version, Ri and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl.
[00141] Alternatively, Rt and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a ring denoted by formula (H):
Figure imgf000034_0001
(π) wherein the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C3hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, C C3alkyl, C2-C alkylcarboxy, Cι-C3alkoxy, Cι-C2oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur (e.g., an acetal, thioacetal, ketal, or thioketal group); and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-Cscarbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl. Examples of substituents containing a fused ring system include the perhydroindolyl and
1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolinyl groups.
[00142] In connection with the ring of formula (II), any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds. Thus, the ring of formula (Et) may be saturated or unsaturated, and an unsaturated ring may contain one, or more than one, sites of unsaturation. In other words, the ring of formula (II) may contain one or more double bonds, it being understood, however, that the unsaturated ring of formula (IT) is chemically stable.
[00143] Alternatively, Ri and R2, when taken together with the 2-amino nitrogen of formula (I), may complete a bicyclic ring. Bicyclic rings include, for example,
3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonane, 2-azabicyelo[2.2.2]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, and
3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptane. For these derivatives, the 2-substituents ofthe cyclohexyl ethers of formula (I) are the following groups: 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo-
[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl.
[00144] Ri and R2, when taken together may contain only a single heteroatom.
Preferred heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. An example of a ring in which Ri and R2 together include an oxygen heteroatom is the moφholinyl group. An example of a ring where Ri and R2 together include a second nitrogen heteroatom is the piperazinyl group.
[00145] Cyclohexane substituents R and 1^ may be independently attached to ring positions 3, 4, 5 or 6 (i.e., both R3 and R4 may be attached to the same ring position or each attached to different ring positions). R3 and R are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, C]-C6alkyl, and Ci-Cβalkoxy, and, when both R3 and R4 are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur. Preferred heterocyclic substituents contain either a single oxygen or a single sulfur ring atom.
[0100] Depending upon the identity of X, the ether side chain, -CH(R5)-X-A, in formula (I) may take several forms. For example, a compound of formula (I) may have X as a
-C(R6,Rι )-Y- group, where Y may be any of a direct bond, an oxygen atom (O), a sulfur atom (S) or a Cι-C4alkylene group. Re and Rj4 are independently selected from hydrogen,
Ci-Cβalkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R$ and Ri4, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro CrCscycloalkyl. Thus, compounds ofthe invention include compounds of formula (I) where R and R14 are hydrogen and Y is a direct bond, such that X maybe CH2.
[0101] Alternatively, X may be an alkenylene moiety, e.g., a cis-oτ trαrø-alkenylene moiety,
C(Rι3)=CH, where Rj3 maybe any of hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl or benzyl.
For compounds of formula (I) where X is an alkenylene moiety, X is preferably a trαns-alkenylene moiety.
[0102] Alternatively, X may be a direct bond. Independent ofthe selections for A, X and other variables, R5 is selected from hydrogen, Cj-Cβalkyl, aryl and benzyl.
[0103] In one variation, X is either a -C(R6,Rι )-Y- or a C(Rι )=CH group, and is not a direct bond. In another variation, the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when Rj and R2 are hydrogen. In another variation, X is selected from a direct bond, -C(Rβ,Rι4)-Y-, and -C(Rι3)=CH-, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (Ifl) then at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is not hydrogen. In another variation, the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when A is formula (HI) and each of R7, R8 and R9 is hydrogen. In another variation, the compounds ofthe invention exclude those compounds wherein X is a direct bond when A is formula (HI).
[0104] Ether side chain component A is generally a hydrophobic moiety. Typically, a hydrophobic moiety is comprised of non-polar chemical groups such as hydrocarbons or hydrocarbons substituted with halogens or ethers or heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atoms. Suitable hydrocarbons are Cs-Cι alkyl and C3-Cι carbocyclic rings. Particularly prefeπed cyclic hydrocarbons include selected aromatic groups such as phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, indenyl, acenaphthyl, and fluorenyl and are represented by formulae (III), (TV), (V), (VI), (VII), or (Vm) respectively.
[0105] A suitable "A" group in the formula above is a phenyl ring represented by formula
(Tfl):
Figure imgf000036_0001
( ) where R , R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl5 aryl and
N(Ri5,Rι6) where R15 and ι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cδalkyl.
[0106] For compounds of formula (I) where X is a direct bond or CH2, at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is preferably selected from amine (-NR15R16, where R15 and Rι6 are independently hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cβalkyl), bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl,
Ci-Cδalkoxy, C2-C7alkylcarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl or aryl groups. For compounds of formula
(I) when X is CH=CH, and R3 and Rt are hydrogen, at least one of R , R8 and R9 is preferably a substituent other than hydrogen. In one variation, the present invention provides compounds of formula (I) where A includes phenyl groups of formula (1111) such that at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is not hydrogen, i.e., formula (HI) is a phenyl group that contains at least one non-hydrogen substituent. In another variation, R7, R8 and R9 are selected from amine
(-NR15R16, where R15 and R]6 are independently hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and
Cι-C6alkyl), bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkylcarbonyl and
Cι-C6thioalkyl, i.e., none of R7, R8 or R9 is aryl. In another variation, A does not include a phenyl ring of formula (El) when X is a direct bond.
[0107] Other suitable "A" groups are 1 -naphthyl groups as represented by formula (IN):
Figure imgf000037_0001
(IV)
where Rio and π are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Rι6) where Rι5 and (6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl.
[0108] Other suitable "A" groups are 2-naphthyl group as represented by formula (V):
Figure imgf000038_0001
(V)
where Rio and Rn are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cj-Cβthioalkyl, and
N(Ri5,R16) where R15 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl, as defined above.
[0109] Other suitable "A" groups are aromatic groups represented by formula (VT):
Figure imgf000038_0002
(VT)
where Rι2 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C alkanoyloxy,
Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Riδ) where R15 and Ri6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-Cβalkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to Rι when Z is N, and Rι7 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl.
[0110] The aryl groups of formula (VI) are derivatives of indene, indole, benzofuran, and thianaphthene when Z is methylene, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, respectively. Preferred heterocyclic groups of formula (VI) include indole where Z is NH, benzofuran where Z is O, and thianaphthene where Z is S. As described below, in a preferred embodiment, Z is O, S or N-R17, and in a particularly preferred embodiment Z is O or S.
[0111] Another suitable "A" group is acenaphthyl groups as represented by formula (VII):
Figure imgf000039_0001
(VTJ) [0112] Still another suitable "A" group is the fluorenyl group represented by formula (VIE):
Figure imgf000039_0002
(VET)
[0113] In some variations, ether side chain component A is an acenapthyl or fluorenyl group only when X is a direct bond or CH . In other variations, the acenaphthyl group is a
1 -acenaphthyl group, and the fluorenyl group is a 9-fluorenyl group.
[0114] In a particular variation of formula (I), X is (CH2)-Y. For these variations, Y is preferably a direct bond, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom. In a another variation, Y is a direct bond or an oxygen atom. In still another variation Y is a direct bond and X is
C(R6,Rι4), where Re and Rι4 are as defined above. In yet another variation, X is C(Rι3)=CH, and Rι3 is a hydrogen atom. For these variations, R3 and R} may be independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5- positions.
[0115] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (I), wherein: independently at each occurrence, X is selected from a direct bond, -C(R6,Rj4)-Y- and -C(Rι3)=CH~, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (El) then at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is not hydrogen; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S and Cι-C4alkylene; Rn is selected from hydrogen, Ci -Chalky., C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-Csalkyl, C3-Csalkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C -Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Ci- C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (IT):
Figure imgf000040_0001
(H) wherein the ring of formula (E) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more of the additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C3hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, Cι-C3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, Cι-C3alkoxy, Cι-C2oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more of the additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci- alkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C hydroxyalkyl and C3-C alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and Rij are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (I) at the 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Csalkyl and Ci-Cδalkoxy, and, when both R3 and ^ are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R5, R and Rι are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R6 and Rι4, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C3-C5cycloalkyl; A is selected from C5-Cι2alkyl, a C3-Cι3carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (ET), (TV), (V), (VI), (VE) and (VET):
Figure imgf000041_0001
(IE) where R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl and N(Rιs,Riδ) where R15 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl and Cι-C6alkyl;
Figure imgf000041_0002
(TV) (V) where Rio and Rn are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Ri6) where Rj5 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cβalkyl;
Figure imgf000042_0001
where R]2 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Riδ) where R15 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cβalkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to Rπ when Z is N, and Ri7 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000042_0002
(VE) (VET) including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and solvates and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of any ofthe foregoing.
[0116] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (LX), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000042_0003
(LX) wherein, independently at each occurrence, X is selected from a direct bond, -CH=CH- and -C(Rδ,Rι4)-Y-; Y is selected from a direct bond, O and S; and Ri, R2, R3, R4, Rδ, R , R8, R9, Rio, Rπ, Rι2, Rι4, A and Z are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
[0117] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (X), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000043_0001
wherein, independently at each occurrence, X is selected from a direct bond, -CH=CH- and -C(Rδ,Rι4)-Y-; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, and S; Ri, R2, Rδ and Rj4 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R and R4 are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5 -positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and Ci-Cδalkoxy; and A is selected from Cs-Cι alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
(IN), (V), and (VI) as above for compounds of formula (I), wherem Z, R7, R8, R9, Rj0, Rπ and
Rι2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
[0118] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XI), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000044_0001
(XI) wherein, independently at each occurrence, Ri and R2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R3 and R are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy; and A is selected from C5-Cι2alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
(TN), (V), and (VT) as above for compounds of formula (I), wherein Z, R7, R8, R9, Rio, R11 and
Rι2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
[0119] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XII), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000044_0002
wherein, independently at each occurrence, Ri and R2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R3 and ^ are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy; and A is selected from Cs-Cι2alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, and any of formulae (IE),
(TN), (V), and (VI) as above for compounds of formula (I), wherein Z, R7, R8, R9, Rio, Ru and
Rπ are defined as above for compounds of formula (I).
[0120] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XIE), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000045_0001
wherem, independently at each occurrence, X is selected from -C(R6,Rι )-Y- and -CH=CH-; Y, Ri R2j Rδ and Rj4 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R3 and R> are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring at the 4- or 5-positions, and are independently selected from hydrogen and methoxy; and A is selected from C3-C8cycloalkyl and any of formulae (ET), (TV), (V), (VT),
(VE) and (VET) as above for compounds of formula (I), where R8 and R9 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); R7, Rio, Ru and Rj2 are hydrogen, and Z is selected from O, S and Ν-R17 where Rπ is selected from hydrogen and methyl.
[0121] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XIV), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000046_0001
(XIV) wherein, independently at each occurrence, Ri and R2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); A is selected from any of formulae (IE), (IV), (V) and (VI) as above for compounds of formula (I), wherein R7, Rio, Rπ, and Rι2, are hydrogen, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methanesulfonamido, methanoyloxy, methoxycarbonyl, nitro, sulfamyl, thiomethyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and NH2, with the proviso that at least one of
Rs and R9 is not hydrogen; and Z is selected from O and S.
[0122] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XV), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000046_0002
(XV) wherein, independently at each occurrence, Ri and R2 are defined as above for compounds of formula (I); and A is selected from any of formulae (Bl), (IV), (V) and (VI) as defined above for compounds of formula (I), wherein R7, R!0, Rπ, and Rι2, are hydrogen, R8 and R9 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methanesulfonamido, methanoyloxy, methoxycarbonyl, nitro, sulfamyl, thiomethyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and NH2, with the proviso that at least one of
R8 and R9 is not hydrogen; and Z is selected from O and S.
[0123] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XVI), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000047_0001
(XVD wherein, independently at each occurrence, X is selected from a direct bond, trα«s-CH=CH-, -CH2- and -CH2-0-; Ri and R2 are both methoxyethyl or, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, complete a ring selected from pyrrolidinyl, 2- ketopyπolidinyl, 3-ketopyrrolidinyl, 2-acetoxypyrrolidinyl, 3-acetoxypyrroridinyl, 2- hydroxypyrrolidinyl, 3-hydroxypyrrolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, piperidinyl, 2-ketopiperidinyl, 3- ketopiperidinyl, 4-ketopiperidinyl, acetylpiperazinyl, l,4-dioxa-7-azaspiro[4.4]non-7-yl, hexahydroazepinyl, moφholinyl, N-methylpiperazinyl and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonanyl; and A is selected from cyclohexyl, monochlorophenyl, 2,6-dichlorophenyl,
3,4-dichlorophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 2,4-dibromophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 4-bromophenyl,
3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 3-benzo(b)thiophenyl, 4-benzo(b)thiophenyl,
(2-trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 2,4-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, and (4-trifluoromethyl)phenyl. [0124] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XVTJ), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000048_0001
(XVE) wherein, independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 2 and 3; Rig is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions; R19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen; and R o is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof. In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound that is a trans configuration of formula
(XVE) as represented by formula (XVBI), or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000048_0002
wherein, independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 2 and 3; Rι8 is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions; R19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen; and R20 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof. [0125] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (TXX); or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000049_0001
(TXX) wherem, independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 2 and 3; Ri8 is either hydrogen or methyl and is independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (XVE) at one ofthe 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions; R19 is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine, fluorine and hydrogen; and R2o is selected from a group consisting of bromine, chlorine and fluorine; including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof.
[0126] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof:
Figure imgf000050_0001
(XX) wherem, R3, * and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Cι-C6alkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, with the proviso that R , Rt and R5 cannot all be hydrogen. [0127] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0128] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherem, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0129] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0130] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are independently selected from Cι-C6alkoxy. [0131] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, * and R5 are independently selected from Cr alkoxy.
[0132] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are Ci alkoxy. [0133] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XX), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R3 is hydrogen, i and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
[0134] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
Figure imgf000051_0001
prodrug thereof: (XXI) wherein, R3, Ri and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0135] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0136] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0137] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, » and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0138] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are independently selected from Cj-Cβalkoxy.
[0139] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are independently selected from Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0140] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, j and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
[0141] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXI), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
[0142] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof:
Figure imgf000053_0001
(XXE) wherein, R3, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0143] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0144] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0145] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0146] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, Rj and R5 are independently selected from Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0147] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, i and R5 are independently selected from CpCδalkoxy.
[0148] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, i and R5 are d alkoxy. [0149] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, R4 and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
[0150] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
Figure imgf000054_0001
prodrug thereof: (XXITJ) wherein, R3, R and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0151] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0152] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0153] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R3 is hydrogen, R4. and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Cι-C6alkoxy.
[0154] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R3 is hydrogen, 4 and R5 are independently selected from Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0155] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, j and R5 are independently selected from Ci-Cβalkoxy. [0156] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIE), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R3 is hydrogen, Rj and R5 are Cialkoxy. [0157] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXET), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R3 is hydrogen, Rj and R5 are Cialkoxy.
[0158] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or
Figure imgf000056_0001
prodrug thereof:
(xxrv) wherein, R and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cδalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0159] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of foπnula (XXJN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0160] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, R4. and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and -Cβalkoxy, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof.
[0161] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherem, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydroxy and Cι-C3alkoxy.
[0162] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, 4 and R5 are independently selected from
Ci-Cβalkoxy.
[0163] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIN), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R and R5 are independently selected from Cι-C alkoxy.
[0164] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, amide, complex, chelate, stereoisomer, stereoisomeric mixture, geometric isomer, crystalline or amoφhous form, metabolite, metabolic precursor or prodrug thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, Ri and R5 are Ci alkoxy.
[0165] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound of formula (XXIV), or a solvate, pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, wherein, R4 and R5 are alkoxy.
[0166] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXV),
Figure imgf000058_0001
(XXV) wherein: R3, R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cβalkoxy; or, R3, I t are independently selected from hydroxyl and Cι-C6alkoxy and R5 is hydrogen; or, R3, R4 are both Ci-Cβalkoxy and R5 is hydrogen; or R3, R are both methoxy and R5 is hydrogen; or including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof, and mixtures thereof, with the proviso that R , * and R5 cannot all be hydrogen; and rv ru"° indicates a bond that provides a R stereoisomer or a S stereoisomer at the position to which the bond is attached.
[0167] In one variation, the hydroxyl substituent is positioned at the 3 position ofthe pyrrolidinyl ring in (XXV). In another variation, the stereochemistry at the position of the cycloalkyl ring of (XXV) containing the nitrogen group is racemic, which may be provided for any ofthe variations mentioned above.
[0168] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000058_0002
wherein: the — bond to the ether oxygen indicates that the ether and amine groups attached to the cyclohexyl group are in a trans configuration, and the C-l and C-2 carbons ofthe cyclohexyl group may be either R,R configuration or S,S configuration; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C alkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cr hydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R2are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R2, are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (XXVI) to form a ring denoted by formula (IV):
Figure imgf000059_0001
(IV) wherein the ring of formula (IN) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C3hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, -
C3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, Cι-C3alkoxy, Cι-C2oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a
C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-
C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2 are taken together to form
Figure imgf000059_0002
wherein the OH group may be at any position on the pyrrolidinyl ring, including the 3- position; Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (XXVI), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3 azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan 3 yl, 2 azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan 2 yl, 3 azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan 3 yl and 3 azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan 3 yl; R3 and R4 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl and N(Ri5,Rι6) where R15 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl and Ci-Cβalkyl; and
[0169] In one version of formula (XXVI), R3 and j are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl and Ci-Cβalkoxy. In another version of formula (XXVI), both R3 and R^t are Ci-Cβalkoxy. In another variation, both R3 and Rj are methoxy. In still another variation of formula (XXVI), R3 and K are positioned at the 3 and 4 positions ofthe aromatic ring, wherein the position on the aromatic ring containing the alkyl chain is designated the 1 position, this variation may be combined with any other variation mentioned above. [0170] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVE), or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof.
Figure imgf000060_0001
(XXVE) (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane [0171] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound ofthe formula (XXVTJi),
Figure imgf000061_0001
(xxvm) (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride .
[0172] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is compound or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof, or mixture comprising one or more said compounds or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof, selected from the group consisting of:
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2-naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of (1R,2R)- [2-(4-moφholinyl)- 1 -(2-naphthenethoxy)]cyclohexane
Figure imgf000061_0002
and (1 S,2S)-[2-(4-moφholmyl)-l -(2- naphthenethoxy)]cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(l-naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (1S,2S) -[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(l- naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of (1R,2R)- [2-(4-moφholinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane
Figure imgf000061_0003
and (1S,2S) -[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(l-naphthenethoxy)]
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(4-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholmyl)-l-(4- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of
Figure imgf000062_0001
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(4-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(4- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane (lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-[2-(2-naphthoxy) ethoxy]] cyclohexane or (1S,2S) -[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l- [2-(2-naphthoxy)ethoxy]] cyclohexane or a mixture of (1 R,2R)-[2-(4-moφholmyl)-l -[2-(2-naphthoxy) ethoxy]] cyclohexane and (1S,2S) -[2-(4-moφholinyl)-
Figure imgf000062_0002
1 -[2-(2-naphthoxy)ethoxy]] cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-[2-(4-bromophenoxy) sthoxy]] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l- [2-(4-bromophenoxy) ethoxy]] cyclohexane or a mixture of (1 R,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l -[2-(4- oromophenoxy) ethoxy]] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-
Figure imgf000062_0003
^4-moφholinyl)-l-[2-(4-bromophenoxy) ethoxy]] cyclohexane
;iR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphen 3thoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l- 3,4-dimethoxyphen ethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture
Figure imgf000062_0004
jf(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphen Jthoxy)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)- l -(3,4-dimethoxyphen ethoxy)] cyclohexane ( lR,2R)-[2-(l -pyrrolidinyl)- 1 -(1 -naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(l-pyrrolidinyl)-l-(l- naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of (1R,2R)- [2-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane
Figure imgf000063_0001
and ( 1 S,2S)-[2-(l -pyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy)] cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2-(benzo[b]thiophen-3- yl)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- (benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)] cyclohexane or a mixture of (lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-
Figure imgf000063_0002
yl)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- (benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)] cyclohexane
(1 R,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l -(2-(benzo[b]thiophen-4- yl)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- (benzo[b]thiophen-4-yl)] cyclohexane or a mixture of (lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2-(benzo[b]thiophen-4- yl)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholmyl)-l-(2-
Figure imgf000063_0003
(benzo[b]thiophen-4-yl)]cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2~(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of
Figure imgf000063_0004
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane (lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lR,2R)-[2-(4- moφholinyl)- 1 -(2-bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane
Figure imgf000064_0001
and (1 S,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(2- bromophenethoxy)] cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-(3,4- dimethoxyphenyl) propoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-(3,4- dimethoxyphenyl) propoxy)] cyclohexane or a mixture of(lR,2R)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-(3,4-
Figure imgf000064_0002
dimethoxyphenyl) propoxy)] cyclohexane and
(lS,2S)-[2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3-(3,4- dimethoxyphenyl) propoxy)] cyclohexane
(1 R,2R) -[2-[bis(2-methoxyethyl)aminyl]- 1 -(2- naphthen ethoxy)] cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-[2-[bis(2- methoxyethyl)ammyϊ]-l -(2-naphthen ethoxy)] cyclohexane and a mixture of (1R,2R) -[2-[bis(2-
Figure imgf000064_0003
methoxyethyl)aminyl]-l -(2-naphthen ethoxy)] cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-[2-[bis(2- methoxyethyl)aminyl]- 1 -(2-naphthen ethoxy)] cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3,4-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l- (3,4-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane or a mixture of
Figure imgf000064_0004
(lR,2R)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-(3,4-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l- (3,4-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane
( 1 R,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l -( 1 -naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane or (lSs2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(l- naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane or a mixture of (1R,2R)- 2-(3 -ketopyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy)
Figure imgf000065_0001
cyclohexane and ( IS, 2S)-2-(3 -ketopyrrolidinyl)- 1-(1- naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane
( 1 R,2R)-2-( 1 -acetylpiperazinyl)- 1 -(2-naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-(l-acetylpiperazinyl)-l-(2- naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane or a mixture of (1R,2R)-
Figure imgf000065_0002
2-(l-acetylpiperazinyl)-l-(2-naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-(l-acetylpiperazinyl)-l-(2- naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6- dichlorophenethoxy) cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-(3- ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophenethoxy)
Figure imgf000065_0003
cyclohexane or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-(3- ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophenethoxy) cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6- dichlorophenethoxy) cyclohexane
(lR,2R)-2-[l ,4-dioxa-7-azaspiro[4.4]non-7-yl]-l -(1 - naphthen ethoxy) cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-[l,4-dioxa- 7-azaspiro[4.4]non-7-yl]-l -(1 -naphthen ethoxy) cyclohexane and a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-[l,4-dioxa-7-
Figure imgf000065_0004
azaspiro[4.4]non-7-yl]-l -(1 -naphthen ethoxy) cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-[l,4-dioxa-7- ιzaspiro[4.4]non-7-yl]-l -(1 -naphthen ethoxy) ;yclohexane
lR,2S)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-[(2- rifluoromethyl)phenethoxy] cyclohexane nonohydrochloride or
Figure imgf000066_0001
;iS,2R)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-[(2- xifluoromethyl)phenethoxy] cyclohexane rnonohydrochloride or a mixture of (lR,2S)-2-(4- moφholinyl)-l-[(2-trifluoromethyl)phenethoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (1 S,2R)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l -[(2- rrifluoromethyl)phenethoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-[3- (cyclohexyl)propoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (1 S,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l -[3- (cyclohexyl)propoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride
Figure imgf000066_0002
or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-[3- (cyclohexyl)propoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-[3- (cyclohexyl)pro oxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(3-acetoxypyrrolidinyl)-l-(l- naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (1 S,2S)-2-(3-acetoxypyrrolidinyl)-l -(1 - naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of ( 1 R,2R)-2-(3 -acetoxypyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -
Figure imgf000066_0003
naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (1 S,2S)-2-(3-acetoxypyrrolidinyl)-l -(1 - naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(4-moφholmyl)-l-[(2,6- dichlorophenyl)methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-(4-moφholinyl)-l-
Figure imgf000067_0001
[(2,6-dichlorophenyl)methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-(4- moφholinyl)- 1 -[(2, 6-dichlorophenyl)methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(4- moφholinyl)-l-[(2,6-dichlorophenyl)methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-[(2,6-dichlorophenyl) methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (1S,2S)- 2-(3-ketopyτrolidinyl)-l-[(2,6-dichlorophenyl) methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture
Figure imgf000067_0002
of (lR,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)-l -[(2,6- dichlorophenyl) methoxy] cyclohexane . monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidmyl)- l-[(2,6-dichlorophenyl) methoxy] cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(3-hydroxypyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-
(3 -hydroxypyrrolidinyl)-l -(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy)
Figure imgf000067_0003
cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of
(1 R,2R)-2-(3-hydroxypyrrolidinyl)-l -(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (1S,2S)-
2-(3 -hydroxypyrrolidinyl)- 1 -(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride lR,2R)-2-(3-ketoρyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,2-diphenylethoxy) yclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-(3- :etopyrrolidinyl)-l -(2,2-diphenylethoxy) cyclohexane nonohydrochloride or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-(3-
Figure imgf000068_0001
:etopyrrolidinyl)-l -(2,2-diphenylethoxy) cyclohexane nonohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrcolidmyl)- -(2,2-diphenylethoxy) cyclohexane nonohydrochloride lR,2R)-2-(3-thiazolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophen ;thoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2- 3-thiazolidinyl)- l-(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy)
Figure imgf000068_0002
cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of R,2R)-2-(3-thiazolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (1S,2S)- i-(3-thiazolidinyl)-l-(2,6-dichlorophenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride i R,2S)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2R)-2-(3- ketopyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane
Figure imgf000068_0003
monohydrochloride or a mixture of (lR,2S)-2-(3- ketopyrrolidinyl)- 1 -( 1 -naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (lS,2R)-2-(3-ketopyrrolidinyι)- 1-(1 -naphthenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-(3-hydroxypyrrolidinyl)-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane
Figure imgf000068_0004
monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-(3- hydrox pyrrolidinyl)- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of ( 1 R,2R)-2-(3-hydroxypyrrolidinyl)- 1 -(3 ,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(3- hydroxypyrrolidinyl)-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride
[0173] Also described here is a composition that includes one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table, or includes a solvate or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table. The composition may or may not include additional components. Additional components that may be used are described elsewhere in detail in this patent. [0174] In another version ofthe aminocyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound or mixture comprising compounds, or any solvate thereof, selected from the group consisting of:
Structure Chemical name (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)/(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidmyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2- [(3R)/(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphen ethoxy)- cyclohexane or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)/(3S)- Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-[(3R)/(3S)-
Figure imgf000069_0001
Hydroxypyπolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-[(3R)- Hydroxypyπolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane and a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)- Hydroxypyπolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrcolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane or (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)- Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane and a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)- Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-
Figure imgf000069_0002
cyclohexane and (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-
Figure imgf000070_0001
Figure imgf000071_0001
(lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride or a mixture of (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dmιethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane
Figure imgf000072_0001
monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)- Hydroxypyrrolidmyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)- cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyρhenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride
(lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride
Figure imgf000072_0002
[0175] Also described here is a composition that includes one or more ofthe compounds or mixtures listed in the above table, or includes a solvate or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more, of the compounds or mixtures listed in the above table. The composition may or may not include additional components. Additional components that may be used are described elsewhere in detail in this patent.
[0176] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is one ofthe following compounds: (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)- Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenefhoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (1 S,2S)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base or any salt thereof, or any solvate thereof; (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride, or any solvate thereof; (lR,2R)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride, or any solvate thereof; (lS,2S)-2- [(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride, or any solvate thereof; or (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane monohydrochloride, or any solvate thereof. [0177] In another version ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe amino cyclohexyl ether compounds described in this patent. That is, for each amino cyclohexyl ether compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino cyclohexyl ether ion channel modulating compounds. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amoφhous form, and may be present in solution. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002.
Aminocycloalkyl Ether Ion Channel Modulating Compounds with 5, 7, and 8
Membered Cycloalkyl Rings
[0178] One class of compounds that are ion channel modulating compound comprise an aminocycloalkyl ether core structure having an ether oxygen atom at position 1 of a cycloalkyl ring, and an amine nitrogen atom at position 2 ofthe cycloalkyl ring. In one version the cycloalkyl ring is a 5, 7, or 8 membered ring.
[0179] In one version ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound having an ether oxygen atom (Q=O in formula (LXXX)) at position 1 of a cycloalkyl ring, and an amine nitrogen atom at position 2 ofthe cycloalkyl ring, where the cycloalkyl ring is either cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl, with other positions numbered in corresponding order as shown below in structure
(A) for cyclopentane, structure (B) for cycloheptane, and structure (C) for cyclooctane:
Figure imgf000074_0001
[0180] The bonds from the cycloalkyl ring to the 1 -oxygen and 2-nitrogen atoms in the above formula may be relatively disposed in either a cis or trans relationship. In one version, the stereochemistry ofthe amine and ether substituents ofthe cycloalkyl ring is either (R,R)-trans or (S,S)-trans. In another version, the stereochemistry is either (R,S)-cz's or (S,R)-cz's. [0181] In one version ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a compound of formula (IXXX):
Figure imgf000074_0002
(LXXX)
wherein the substituents A, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and X are as described above for formula (I) and wherein Q is an ether oxygen atom (Q = O in formula (LXXX)) and wherem n is 1 , 3 or 4 such that a cyclopentyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl ring is provided.
[0182] Compounds of formula (LXXX) are cycloalkylamines such as aminocycloalkyl ethers. More specifically, these aminocycloalkyl ethers are substituted at position 2 of a cycloalkyl ring with an amine group -NRιR2. The C-l position is an ether (Q=0 in formula (LXXX)) . The cycloalkyl ring may also be substituted with additional substituents (designated as R3 and Rt) as described in more detail below. In formula (LXXX), n is selected from 1, 3 and 4, and represents a number of carbon atoms such that when n equals 1, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cyclopentane (i.e., a cyclopentyl group), when n equals 3, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cycloheptane (i.e., a cycloheptyl group), and when n equals 4, the ring shown in Formula (LXXX) is a substituted cyclooctane (i.e., a cyclooctyl group). Examples of specific compounds represented by formula (LXXX) are described below
[0183] Depending upon the selection of substituents Ri and R2, the compounds of formula
(LXXX) maybe primary, secondary, or tertiary amines (i.e., both Ri and R2 are hydrogen, only one of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, or neither of Ri and R2 are hydrogen, respectively).
Where the amine is tertiary, it may be a cyclic amine. Amine substituents Ri and R2 may be independently selected from substituents which include hydrogen, alkyl groups contaming from one to eight carbon atoms (i.e., Cι-C8alkyl), alkoxyalkyl groups containing from three to eight carbon atoms (i.e., C3-C8alkoxyalkyl), alkyl groups containing from one to eight carbon atoms where one ofthe carbon atoms is substituted with a hydroxyl group (i.e., C\-
C8hydroxyalkyl), and aralkyl groups containing from seven to twelve carbon atoms (i.e.,
C7-Cι2aralkyl).
[0184] Alternatively, Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (LXXX), may form a ring denoted by formula (11):
Figure imgf000075_0001
(π) wherein the ring of formula (E) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, C]-C3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, CrC3alkoxy, Cι-C2oalkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur (e.g., an acetal, thioacetal, ketal, or thioketal group); and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C -C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl. Examples of substituents containing a fused ring system include the perhydroindolyl and
1 ,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolinyl groups.
[0185] In connection with the ring of formula (E), any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds. Thus, the ring of formula (IT) may be saturated or unsaturated, and an unsaturated ring may contain one, or more than one, sites of unsaturation.
In other words, the ring of formula (E) may contain one or more double bonds, it being understood, however, that the unsaturated ring of formula (E) is chemically stable.
[0186] Alternatively, Ri and R , when taken together with the 2-amino nitrogen of formula
(LXXX), may complete a bicyclic ring. Bicyclic rings include, for example,
3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonane, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, and
3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptane. For these derivatives, the C-2 substituents ofthe cycloalkyl ethers of formula (I) are the following groups: 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo-
[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl.
[0187] Preferably for formula (E), Ri and R2, when taken together, contain only a single heteroatom. Preferred heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. An example of a ring in which Ri and R together include an oxygen heteroatom is the moφholinyl group. An example of a ring where i and R2 together include a second nitrogen heteroatom is the piperazinyl group.
[0188] Cycloalkyl substituents R3 and R4 may be independently attached to any ofthe ring positions except positions 1 and 2 (e.g., both R3 and 4 may be attached to the same ring position or each attached to different ring positions). R3 and R4 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-C6alkyl, and Ci-Cβalkoxy, and, when both R3 and P^ are attached to the same cycloalkyl ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur.
Preferred heterocyclic substituents contain either a single oxygen or a single sulfur ring atom.
[0189] Depending upon the identity of X, the ether sidechain, -CH(R5)-X-A, in formula
(LXXX) may take several forms. For example, a compound of formula (IXXX) may have X as a -C(Rδ,Rι4)-Y- group, where Y may be any of a direct bond, an oxygen atom (O), a sulfur atom (S) or a Cι-C4alkylene group. R6 and R14 are independently selected from hydrogen,
Ci-C6alkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R and Rι4, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C -C5Cycloalkyl. Thus, compounds ofthe invention include compounds of formula (LXXX) where R6 and Rι4 are hydrogen and Y is a direct bond, such that X maybe CH2.
[0190] Alternatively, X may be an alkenylene moiety, e.g., a cis-or trα/zs-alkenylene moiety,
C(Rι3)=CH, where R]3 may be any of hydrogen, Ci-Cόalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl or benzyl.
For compounds of formula (LXXX) where X is an alkenylene moiety, X is preferably a trαws-alkenylene moiety.
[0191] Alternatively, X may be a direct bond. Independent ofthe selections for A, X and other variables, R5 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, aryl and benzyl.
[0192] Ether sidechain component A is generally a hydrophobic moiety. Typically, a hydrophobic moiety is comprised of non-polar chemical groups such as hydrocarbons or hydrocarbons substituted with halogens or ethers or heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur ring atoms. Suitable hydrocarbons are Cs-Cι2alkyl and C3-Cι3carbocyclic rings. Particularly preferred cyclic hydrocarbons include selected aromatic groups such as phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, indenyl, acenaphthyl, and fluorenyl and are represented by formulae (IE), (IV), (V), (VI), (VE), or (VET) respectively.
[0193] A suitable "A" group within the compounds ofthe present invention is a phenyl ring represented by formula (ET):
Figure imgf000077_0001
(HI)
where R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, aryl and
N(Rιs,Riδ) where R15 and Riδ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-C6alkyl.
[0194] For compounds of formula (IXXX) where X is a direct bond or CH2, at least one of
R7, R8 and R9 is preferably selected from amine (- R15R16, where R15 and Rj6 are independently hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci -Chalky!), bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cδalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkylcarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl or aryl groups. For compounds of formula (I) when X is CH=CH, and R3 and R4 are hydrogen, at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is preferably a substituent other than hydrogen. [0195] Other suitable "A" groups in compounds ofthe present invention are 1 -naphthyl groups as represented by formula (IN):
Figure imgf000078_0001
(IN)
where R o and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl,
C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-C6alkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl, and
Ν(Ri5,Riδ) where Rι5 and Riδ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cδalkyl.
[0196] Other suitable "A" groups in compounds ofthe present invention are 2-naphthyl group as represented by formula (V):
Figure imgf000078_0002
(V)
where Rio and Ru are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cj-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,R16) where R 5 and Rj6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-Cβalkyl, as defined above. [0197] Other suitable "A" groups in compounds ofthe present invention are aromatic groups represented by formula (VI):
Figure imgf000079_0001
(VI)
where Ri2 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy,
Ci-Cδalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, -Cβthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Rie) where R15 and Riδ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cβalkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to R17 when Z is N, and π is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl.
[0198] The aryl groups of formula (VI) are derivatives of indene, indole, benzofuran, and thianaphthene when Z is methylene, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, respectively. Preferred heterocyclic groups of formula (VI) include indole where Z is NH, benzofuran where Z is O, and thianaphthene where Z is S. As described below, in a preferred embodiment, Z is O, S or
N-R17, and in a particularly preferred embodiment Z is O or S.
[0199] Another suitable "A" group in compounds ofthe present invention are acenaphthyl groups as represented by formula (VE):
Figure imgf000079_0002
(VE)
[0200] Still another suitable "A" group in compounds ofthe present invention is the fluorenyl group represented by formula (VET):
Figure imgf000080_0001
(VET)
[0201] Preferably, ether sidechain component A is an acenapthyl or fluorenyl group only when X is a direct bond or CH2. In other variations, the acenaphthyl group is a 1 -acenaphthyl group, and the fluorenyl group is a 9-fluorenyl group.
[0202] In another variation of (LXXX), X is (CH2)-Y. For these variations, Y is a direct bond, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom. In a particular variation, Y is a direct bond or an oxygen atom. In another variation, Y is a direct bond and X is C(Re,Ri4), where Rδ and Rι are as defined above. In another variation, X is C(Rι )=CH, and Rι3 is a hydrogen atom. For these variations, R3 and 1^ are preferably independently attached to the cycloalkyl ring at the 4- or
5- positions.
[0203] Ion channel modulating compounds of formula (LXXX) maybe provided, wherein: independently at each occurrence, n is selected from 1, 3 and 4; Q is either O (oxygen) or -O-C(O); X is selected from a direct bond, -C(Rδ,Rι )-Y- and -C(Rι3)=CH-; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S and Cι-C alkylene; u is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cgalkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, d-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C7-C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2 are independently selected from C -C8alkoxyalkyl, C\- C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (LXXX) to form a ring denoted by formula (E): h? V_ 2 (E) wherein the ring of formula (H) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may bear one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, Cι-C3hydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, Cι-C3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, CrC3alkoxy, Cι-C2oalkanoyloxy, or may form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may bear substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2 are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (LXXX) to form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and R4 are independently attached to the cycloalkyl ring shown in formula (LXXX) at other than the 1 and 2 positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl, Ci-Cδalkyl and Ci-Cβalkoxy, and, when both R3 and P^ are attached to the same cycloalkyl ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R5, Re and Rι4 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cδalkyl, aryl and benzyl, or Rδ and Rι4, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C3-Cscycloalkyl; A is selected from Cs-Cι2alkyl, a C3-Cι3carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (IE), (IV), (V), (VI), (VE) and (VET):
Figure imgf000082_0001
(in) where R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cgalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, aryl and N(Ri5,Rjδ) where R15 and R]6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl and Cj-Cβalkyl;
Figure imgf000082_0002
(IV) (V) where Rio and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cealkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Riδ) where Ris and ι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cδalkyl;
Figure imgf000082_0003
(VI) where R12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cδthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,Ri6) where R15 and Riδ are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cδalkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (LXXX) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to Rι7 when Z is N, and Rπ is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000083_0001
(VE) (VIE) including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof; In another version ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is one ofthe following compounds or mixtures of compounds.
(lR,2R) -2-(4-Moφholinyl)-l-(2-naphthalenethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride or (lS,2S)-2-(4- Moφholinyl)- 1 -(2-naphthalenethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride or a mixture of (1R,2R) -2-(4- Moφholinyl)- 1 -(2-naphthalenethoxy) cyclopentane
Figure imgf000083_0002
monohydrochloride and (lS,2S)-2-(4-Mθφholinyl)-l- .HCI (2-naphthalenethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride (lR,2R) -2-(3- etopyπolidinyl)-l-(2,6- dichlorophenethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride or (1 S,2S)-2-(3-Ketopyrrolidinyl)-l -(2,6-dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride or a mixture of(lR,2R) -2-(3-Ketopyrrolidinyl)-l-(2,6- dichlorophenethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride
Figure imgf000083_0003
and (1 S,2S)-2-(3-Ketopyπoιidmyl)-l~(2,6- dichlorophen ethoxy) cyclopentane monohydrochloride
[0204] In another version ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds, the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe amino cycloalkyl ether compounds described in this patent. That is, for each amino cycloalkyl ether compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino cycloalkyl ether ion channel modulating compounds. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amoφhous form, and may be present in solution. These quaternary protenated amine form of the compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002.
General Description of Ion Channel Modulating Compounds [0205] GeneraUy, any compound that modulates ion channel activity may by an ion channel modulating compound. A compound that modulates ion channel activity may be a compound that increases or decreases ion channel activity. An ion channel modulating compound that decreases ion channel activity may be a compound that blocks ion channel activity completely or partially.
[0206] In another version, any compound that either singly or together with one or more additional compounds selectively inhibit certain combination of cardiac ionic currents is an ion channel modulating compound. The cardiac currents may be the sodium currents and early repolarizing currents. Ion channel modulating compounds may block cardiac currents from extracellular loci. Such compounds act on an external locus ofthe ion channel that is accessible from the extracellular surface. This facilitates access to the ion channel and provides rapid onset kinetics and exhibits frequency dependent blockade of currents. Such properties are all beneficial for compounds used to treat arrhythmias. An ion channel modulating compound may selectively inhibit cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium cunents. Ion channel modulating compounds may be used to selectively inhibit cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents under conditions where an "arrhythmogenic substrate" is present in the heart. An "arrhythmogemc substrate" is characterized by a reduction in cardiac action potential duration and/or changes in action potential moφhology, premature action potentials, high heart rates and may also include increased variability in the time between action potentials and an increase in cardiac milieu acidity due to ischaemia or inflammation. Changes such as these are observed during conditions of myocardial ischaemia or inflammation and those conditions that precede the onset of arrhythmias such as atrial fibrillation. An ion channel modulating compound may be an atrial selective agent. An ion channel modulating compound may treat or prevent ventricular arrhythmia. An ion channel modulating compound block cardiac sodium currents or cardiac early repolarizing currents. An ion channel modulating compound may inhibit multiple cardiac ionic currents. An ion channel modulating compound may be used to treat or prevent anhythmic, including ventricular or atrial arrhythmia, particularly atrial fibrillation.
[0207] The ion channel modulating compounds may block the cardiac ion channels responsible for early repolarizing currents and sodium cuπents; and/or block cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents under conditions where an arrhythmogenic substrate is present in the heart; and/or block the cardiac ion channels responsible for early repolarizing currents and sodium currents under conditions where an arrhythmogenic substrate is present in the heart; and/or block cardiac early repolarizing currents and cardiac sodium currents from extracellular loci in cardiac cells.
[0208] In one variation, the cardiac early repolarizing currents referred to above comprise ionic currents which activate rapidly after depolarization of membrane voltage and which effect repolarization ofthe cell. The early repolarizing currents may comprise the cardiac transient outward potassium cuπent (It0) and/or the ultrarapid delay rectifier current (IκUr)- The cardiac transient outward potassium cunent (It0) and or the ultrarapid delay rectifier current (TκUr) may comprise at least one ofthe Kv4.2, Kv4.3, Kv2.1, Kvl.4 and Kvl.5 currents.
[0209] Ion channel modulating compounds may generally have any pKa, however ion channel modulating compounds typically have pKa values of between 4-9, and may have pKa values that are less than 8, including pKa values between 5-7.5. Methods to determine pKa values are well known in the art (see, e.g., Perrin, "Dissociation Constants of Organic Bases in Aqueous Solution", Butterworth, London, 1972). For ion channel modulating compounds with the specific ranges of pKa described above, the fraction ofthe charged (protonated) species will be increased under the pathological conditions such as cardiac arrhythmias and the presence of an arrhythmogenic substrate in the heart as described above due to the increase in cardiac milieu acidity. Where the charged form of a compound is active, its potency increases under conditions associated with an increases in cardiac milieu acidity. [0210] Particular ion channel modulating compounds have structural characteristics that may be determined by various physical methods, such as single crystal X-ray crystallography. For instance, some ion channel modulating compounds comprise a cycloalkane ring and substituents J and K as shown below in structure T, wherein the relative positions of J and K provide a "C" shaped angle and wherein n = 1, 2, 3 or 4. "C" angle
Figure imgf000086_0001
[0211] Typically, one of J and K comprises a hydrophobic moiety, such as but not limited to a moiety comprising alkyl and/or aryl moieties. In one variation, one of J and K comprises a hydrophobic aromatic moiety, which may be attached to the cycloalkane ring of structure T via an ether bond. Typically, one of J and K comprises a hydrophilic moiety, such as a heteroatom containing moiety, including but not limited to a nitrogen containing moiety that is available to form a quaternary salt and/or a hydroxyl moiety. In one variation, one of J and K comprises a nitrogen containing moiety substituted with a hydroxyl moiety or the like, such as a pyrrolidinyl moiety. In a particular variation of structure T, n = 2, J comprises a aromatic moiety and K comprises a nitrogen containing moiety substituted with a hydroxyl moiety or the like. The cycloalkane ring may be optionally substituted. In one version, the cycloalkane ring may be replaced by a structural moiety imparting rigidity to the relative positions ofthe J and K groups. For example if the J and K groups are attached to atoms L and M that are directly bonded to each other, any group that does not allow substantial rotation about the bond between atoms L and M can impart rigidity to the relative positions ofthe J and K groups. For example, the ion channel modulating compound may be a compound of formula
Figure imgf000087_0001
where J and K are as described above and groups P and R are moieties such that there is not substantial rotation about the L-M bond. In one example P and Q taken together form a cyclic moiety that prevents substantial rotation about the L-M bond.
[0212] In one version, the ion channel modulating compound comprises an amino substituted 5, 6, 7 or 8-membered ring, which may be a 5, 6, 7, or 8-membered substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl ring. The amino substituted cycloalkane ring may be an aminocyclohexyl ring and may be further substituted with one or more additional moieties. In one version, the amino substituted cycloalkane ring is further substituted with an ether moiety. In some instances, the ion channel modulating compound comprises an aminocyclohexyl ring that is further substituted with an ether moiety.
[0213] In another, the ion channel modulating compound is a protenated version of any ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described in this patent. That is, for each ion channel modulating compound described in this patent, the quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compound may also be considered as an amino ion channel modulating compound. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be present in the solid phase, for example in crystalline or amoφhous form, and may he present in solution. These quaternary protenated amine form ofthe compounds may be associated with pharmaceutically acceptable anionic counter ions, including but not limited to those described in for example: "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts, Properties, Selection, and Use", P. Heinrich Stahl and Camille G. Wermuth (Eds.), Published by VHCA (Switzerland) and Wiley-VCH (FRG), 2002
METHODS OF MAKING ANTIARRHYTHMIC COMPOUNDS
[0214] Methods that may be used to synthesize the ion channel modulating compounds described in this section are described in PCT/US03/34655 (filed October 31, 2003), US
60/516,248 (filed October 31, 2003), WO 99/50225, and WO 00/47547 each of which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.
[0215] In one method, illustrated in Figure 1, compounds are prepared by a Williamson ether synthesis (Feuer, H.; Hooz, J. Methods of Formation ofthe Ether Linkage. ϊnPatai, Wiley: New York, 1967; pp 445-492) between an activated form of aminoalcohol 4R with the alkoxide of 3,4-dimethoxyphenethyl alcohol in a polar solvent such as dimethoxyethane (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether) (DME) (Figure 1) that provided the corresponding aminoether 5R in high yield. Subsequent resolution ofthe diastereomers such as by chromatographic separation (e.g. HPLC) to afford 5RRR and 5SSR followed by hydrogenolysis provided compound 1 and compound 2 respectively.
[0216] (1 R,2R)-2-[(3 S)-Hydroxypynolidinyl]- 1 -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane free base and the corresponding monohydrochloride (compound 6) and (lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-hydroxy- pyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane free base and the corresponding monohydrochloride (compound 7) are obtained using a similar synthetic sequence but starting with 3-(S)-hydroxypyrrolidine.
[0217] Hydrogenolysis of (1R,2R)/(1 S,2S)-2-[(3R)-benzyloxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane (5R) provided (1R,2R)/(1S,2S)-2~[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane free base and the corresponding monohydrochloride (compound 4). Similarly, starting with 3-(S)- hydroxypyrrolidine instead of 3-(R)-hydroxypyrrolidine and following the same synthetic sequence will afford (lR,2R)/(lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-benzyloxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane. The latter on hydrogenolysis will provide (lR,2R)/(lS,2S)-2-[(3S)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane free base and the corresponding monohydrochloride (compound 5). (lR,2R)/(lS,2S)-2-[(3R)/(3S)- Hydroxypyrrolidmyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)-cyclohexane free base and the corresponding monohydrochloride (compound 3) can also be synthesized by similar process by starting with racemic 3- hydroxypyrrolidine.
FORMULATIONS. ROUTES OF ADMINISTRATION AND DOSAGE FORMS [0218] In this section are described general formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that may be used in the methods described in this patent. Specific formulations, routes of administration, and dosage forms that maybe used for treating, preventing, and postponing onset of anhythmia are described in more detail in the Method of Treating Arrhythmia and Method of Preventing or Postponing Onset of Arrhythmia sections. Formulation and routes of administration [0219] The ion channel modulating compounds and formulations described herein may be formulated in a dosage form suitable for oral, parenteral, mucosal, nasal, sublingual, transdermal, buccal, topical, vaginal, rectal, ocular or other administration. An ion channel modulating compounds as described herein may be in the form of an immediate and/or modified release formulation or it may be designed to release the ion channel modulating compound in a relatively fast manner in order to enable a relatively fast onset ofthe therapeutic effect. As used herein "compounds" and "compositions" of ion channel modulating compounds includes the ion channel modulating compounds as described herein alone or in combination with other materials, as described below.
Dosage Forms and Dosage Amounts and Dosage Frequency [0220] In general, the amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound present in a composition depends inter alia on the specific ion channel modulating compound and formulation, the age and condition ofthe subject, and the disease or conditions to be treated and/or prevented, the route of administration, and the dosage frequency. [0221] The dosage frequency also depends on the disease or condition to be treated and/or prevented, amount or concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound, the specific composition used, the route of administration, and may incoφorate subject-specific variation including, but not limited to age, weight, gender, genetic background, and overall health. For example, a nasal formulation may be administered once daily e.g. in order to achieve a relatively fast onset ofthe therapeutic effect, or it may be administered more often. The same criteria for selecting dosage frequency applies to other dosage forms including but not limited to a plain tablet composition, a buccal composition, a rectal composition, an oral composition, a topical composition, an ocular composition, or other compositions. [0222] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can be used to provide controlled release ("controlled release formulations") in which the release ofthe ion channel modulating compound is controlled and regulated to allow less frequency of dosing or to improve the pharmacokinetic or toxicity profile of a given active ingredient. [0223] A controlled release formulation as described herein may allow dosage once, twice, or three or more times daily in order to obtain a suitable therapeutic effect. Controlled release may also include continuous and/or sustained release, for example, as from an implantable device. Pulsatile release may also be desirable. Administration may comprise co- administration of more than one dosage unit, such as, e.g. 2-4 dosage units. [0224] Typically, the ion channel modulating compounds described herein are formulated for use in humans. Ion channel modulating compounds can also include veterinary formulations, e.g., pharmaceutical preparations suitable for veterinary uses, e.g., for the treatment of livestock or domestic animals, e.g., dogs, cats, racehorses, etc.
[0225] Actual dosage levels ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the formulations of the ion channel modulating compounds described herein may be varied so as to obtain an amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic effect for a particular subject, ion channel modulating compound, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the subject.
[0226] The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including but not limited to the activity ofthe ion channel modulating compound (or the ester, salt, amide or formulation thereof); the route of administration; the time of administration; the rate of excretion ofthe particular ion channel modulating compound being employed; the duration of the treatment; other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the ion channel modulating compound described herein; the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history ofthe subject being treated; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
[0227] A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount ofthe pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses ofthe ion channel modulating compound at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired therapeutic effect is achieved.
[0228] In general, a suitable dose of an ion channel modulating compound will be the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Prefeπed formulations include oral (immediate or quick release forms) and intravenous forms (TV), nasal forms, sublingual and metered dose inhaler forms. Generally, intravenous and oral forms ofthe ion channel modulating compound for a subject will range from about 0.1 to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day. For ion channel modulating compound such as the aminocyclohexyl ether compound (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, a therapeutic dosage for the intravenous form may be from about 0.1 to about 10 mg per kilogram. Another suitable dosage of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for the intravenous form may be from about 2 to about 5 mg per kilogram. For ion channel modulating compound such as the aminocyclohexyl ether compound (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, a therapeutic dosage for oral administration may be from about 30 to about 1800 mg tablets or capsules b.i.d. Another suitable dosage of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for oral administration maybe from about 300 to about 900 mg tablets or capsules b.i.d.
[0229] Intranasal formulations and patch formulations are also preferred forms. Generally, intranasal formulations and patch formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound for a subject will range from about 0.1 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10 mg per kilogram, even more preferably from about 1 to about 10 mg per kilogram.
[0230] The effective dose ofthe ion channel modulating compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms.
[0231] The subject receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets such as dogs and cats among others in general.
Routes of administration [0232] The ion channel modulating compound described herein may be administered to a subject by any route capable of delivering a therapeutically effective amount ofthe compound including but not limited to administration by oral, parenteral, intracranial, mtraorbital, intracapsular, intraspinal, intracistemal, intrapulmonary, intravenous, intramuscular, intra- arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, enteral, topical, sublingual, buccal, gingival, palatal or rectal means.
[0233] Typically, the ion channel modulating compound is given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, the ion channel modulating compound may be administered parenterally by injection, infusion or inhalation; administered topically by lotion or ointment; or administered rectally by suppositories. Typical forms of administration described herein are not intended to be either limiting or exhaustive, but merely illustrative.
[0234] The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein mean modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion.
[0235] The phrases "systemic administration," or "administered systemically," as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material such as the ion modulating compound so that it enters the subject's system by a direct route or parenteral route and thus is subject to metabolism and other like processes (for example, by subcutaneous administration). The phrases "peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material such as the ion modulating compound so that it enters the subject's system by an indirect or localized route and thus is subject to metabolism and other like processes (for example, by topical administration).
[0236] Regardless ofthe route of administration, the ion channel modulating compounds described herein can be formulated into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms such as described, or other dosage forms known to those of skill in the art.
[0237] The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" as used herein can refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
[0238] The ion channel modulating compounds can be administered alone or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable and/or sterile carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with other drugs (e.g. other cardiovascular agents, antimicrobial agents, etc.). Multiple routes of simultaneous or sequential administration (e.g. oral and transdermal) are also contemplated.
Formulations [0239] Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds can be formulated in any manner suitable for a desired delivery route. Typically, formulations include all physiologically acceptable compositions. Such formulations may include one or more ion channel modulating compounds by itself or in combination with any physiologically acceptable carrier or carriers. The formulation may also enhance, alter, or modify the effect or the ion channel modulating compound and/or physiological milieu ofthe ion channel modulating compound. [0240] While it is possible for an ion channel modulating compound to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the ion channel modulating compounds as a pharmaceutical formulation including other materials. The ion channel modulating compounds may be formulated for administration in any way for use in human or veterinary medicine. The ion channel modulating compound may be active itself, or may be a prodrug, e.g., capable of being converted to an active compound in a physiological setting. [0241] The ion channel modulating compounds described herein may provide pharmaceutically acceptable formulations with therapeutically effective amounts of one or more of ion channel modulating compounds, formulated with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives), other active agents, and/or diluents. Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds maybe for administration in solid, liquid, vapor, or suspension form, including those adapted for oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, polymer release formulations, pastes for application to the tongue; parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin; or intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, suppository, cream or foam. However, in certain embodiments the subject compounds may be simply dissolved or suspended in sterile water. [0242] Ion channel modulating compounds as described herein may be formulated for administration with any biologically acceptable medium, including but not limited to water, buffered saline, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol and the like) or suitable mixtures thereof. The optimum concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the chosen medium can be determined empirically, according to procedures well known in the art. As used herein, "biologically acceptable medium" includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, and the like which may be appropriate for the desired route of administration ofthe pharmaceutical preparation. The use of a biologically acceptable medium for pharmaceutically active substances is known in the art. Suitable biologically acceptable media and their formulation are described, for example, in the most recent version of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences. Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., USA 1985).
[0243] Formulations may contain suitable physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and/or auxiliaries which facilitate processing ofthe ion channel modulating compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include agents which increase or otherwise affect the bioavailability ofthe drug. As used herein, "bioavailability" refers to the effect, availability and persistence ofthe ion channel modulating compound after being administered to a subject.
[0244] Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can be any pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition, or vehicle, including but not limited to a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject agonists to an organ, or portion ofthe body. Each carrier must be compatible with the other ingredients ofthe formulation and not injurious to the subject. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but are not limited to sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; cocoa butter, waxes, animal and vegetable fats, paraffins, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, zinc oxide; oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols, such as propylene glycol; polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol; phosphate buffer solutions; and any other compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
[0245] The ion channel modulating compound may be capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable salts such as inorganic and organic acid or base addition salts ofthe ion channel modulating compounds described herein. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19). In particular, HCI salts ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may be used. Other salt forms include hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, bisulphate, acid citrate, bitartrate, ethansulphonate, sulphate, phosphate or acid phosphate, acetate, maleate, fumarate, lactate, tartrate, L- tartrate, citrate, gluconate, benzenesulphonate (besylate), p-toluenesulphonate (tosylate), methanesulphonate ( esylate), esylate, succinate, salicylate, nitrate, sulfate, etc.
[0246] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds can also include wetting agents; emulsifiers and lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate; coloring agents; release agents; coating agents; sweetening, flavoring, and/or perfuming agents; preservatives; and antioxidants.
[0247] Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include but are not limited to water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. [0248] Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also incoφorate buffering agents and/or salts to aid absoφtion or stabilize the ion channel modulating compound. Other additives, such as chelating agents, enzymatic inhibitors, and the like, which would facilitate the biological activity ofthe pharmaceutical composition may also be incoφorated in the formulation. Foπnulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also contain opacifying agents.
[0249] The formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods known in the art. The amount of ion channel modulating compound that can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form may vary. For example, the amount of ion channel modulating compound in a given formulation may depend upon the host being treated and/or the particular mode of administration. The amount of ion channel modulating compound which can be combined with a carrier to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount ofthe ion channel modulating compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
[0250] Methods of preparing these formulations include the step of bringing into association an ion channel modulating compound with the carrier and/or one or more accessory ingredients. Some formulations may be prepared by bringing an ion channel modulating compound in association with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product.
[0251] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for oral administration maybe in the form of a solid (capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges, powders, dragees, granules); or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion; or as an elixir or syrup; or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia); and/or as mouth rinses or washes and the like; or as a bolus, electuary or paste. [0252] Solid formulations of ion channel modifying compounds may have pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and extenders including but not limited to sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate; starches; lactose; sucrose; glucose; mannitol; and/or silicic acid. Solid formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can include additional components including but not limited to binders such as carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; humectants such as glycerol; disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; solution retarding agents such as paraffin; absoφtion accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds; wetting agents such as cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay; lubricants such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and coloring agents. The formulation may also include buffering agents, particularly when the ion channel modulating compound is in the form of a capsule, tablet or pill. [0253] Solid formulations may also include fillers for soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using excipients such as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
[0254] Solid formulations such as pills and tablets may be formed by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of powdered ion channel modulating compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
[0255] Solid formulations of ion channel modulating compounds described herein, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings. Solid dosage forms may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release ofthe ion channel modulating compound. Thus, solid formulations could include any material that could provide a desired release profile ofthe ion channel modulating compound, including but not limited to hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions, or other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres .
[0256] Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also be formulated to release the ion channel modulating compound only, or preferentially, in a certain portion ofthe gastrointestinal tract, for example, by including an embedding agent. Examples of embedding agents which can be used include but are not limited to polymeric substances and waxes. The ion channel modulating compound may also be in microencapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more ofthe above-described excipients.
[0257] Coated or encapsulating formulations of ion channel modulating compounds may also be formulated to deliver pulsatile, sustained, or extended release. For example one method of pulsatile release could be achieved by layering multiple coatings of ion channel modulating compound, or by incoφorating the ion channel modulating compound within different regions ofthe formulation having different release times.
[0258] Other example of methods and materials for pulsatile delivery include, but are not limited to those described in the patent documents listed below and the patents and publications referenced therein, all of which are incoφorated by reference herein.
US Patent No.
6.645.524 Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms for pulsatile delivery of an antiarrhythmic agent
6.635.277 Composition for pulsatile delivery of diltiazem and process of manufacture
6,627,223 Timed pulsatile drug delivery systems
6.607.751 Controlled release delivery device for pharmaceutical agents incoφorating microbial polysaccharide gum
6.596.314 Controlled release liquid active agent formulation dosage forms
6.555,136 Pharmaceutical dosage form for pulsatile delivery of methylphenidate
6.500.457 Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms for pulsatile delivery of an antiarrhythmic agent
6.461.331 Device and method for infusion of small molecule insulin mimetic materials
6,387,037 Implantable heart assist system and method of applying same
6,372,254 Press coated, pulsatile drug delivery system suitable for oral administration
6.342,249 Controlled release liquid active agent formulation dosage forms
6.340,476 Pharmaceutical dosage form for pulsatile delivery of methylphenidate
6.312,409 Device for generating a pulsatile fluid drug flow
6,217,904 Pharmaceutical dosage form for pulsatile delivery of d-threo- methylphenidate and a second CNS stimulant
6,214,377 Melatonin for the production of a peroral pulsatile form of medication
6,117.450 Method of making a perorally administered solid drug with controlled effective ingredient delivery
6.080,721 Pulmonary delivery of active fragments of parathyroid hormone S.965,521 Pulsatile delivery of leptin receptor ligands
5,840,329 Pulsatile drug delivery system
5,814,607 Pulmonary delivery of active fragments of parathyroid hormone
5,716,318 Method of treating cardiac arrest and apparatus for same
5,607,915 Pulmonary delivery of active fragments of parathyroid hormone
5.456.679 Delivery devices with pulsatile effect
5,318,558 Osmotically driven delivery device with expandable orifice for pulsatile delivery effect
4,698,062 Medical device for pulsatile transdermal delivery of biologically active agents
4,687,423 Electrochemically-driven pulsatile drug dispenser
4,525,165 Fluid handling system for medication infusion system
US Pat. Application No.
20030203029 Controlled release liquid active agent formulation dosage forms
20030194439 Pharmaceutical dosage form for pulsatile delivery of methylphenidate
20030171282 Pulmonary delivery of active fragments of parathyroid hormone
20030170181 Method for preventing abuse of methylphenidate
20030003149 Composition for pulsatile delivery of diltiazem and process of manufacture
20020098232 Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms for pulsatile delivery of an antiaπhythmic agent
20020086055 Controlled release liquid active agent formulation dosage forms 20020082680 Expandable medical device for delivery of beneficial agent 20020058061 Pharmaceutical dosage form for pulsatile delivery of methylphenidate 20020007139 Medical infusion and aspiration system 20010046964 Timed pulsatile drug delivery systems [0259] Liquid dosage formulations for oral administration ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the ion channel modulating compound, the liquid dosage formulations may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, including but not limited to water or other solvents; solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol; oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils); glycerol; tetrahydrofuryl alcohol; polyethylene glycols; and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
[0260] The ion channel modulating compound may also be formulated as a suspension.
Suspensions ofthe ion channel modulating compound may include suspending agents.
Examples of suspending agents include but are not limited to ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols; polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters; microcrystalline cellulose; aluminum metahydroxide; bentonite; agar-agar; tragacanth; and mixtures thereof.
[0261] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository. Suppository formulations may be prepared by mixing one or more ion channel modulating compounds with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers. Suitable earners include any compound which is solid at room temperature but liquid at body temperature, and therefore will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the ion channel modulating compound. Examples of such carriers include but are not limited to cocoa butter; polyethylene glycol; a suppository wax or a salicylate.
[0262] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art.
[0263] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound suitable for the topical or transdermal administration include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The ion channel modulating compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
[0264] Powders and sprays may contain, in addition to an ion channel modulating compound, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays may contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
[0265] The ion channel modulating compound may also be formulated as a transdermal patch. Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery ofthe ion channel modulating compound into the body. Such formulations may be made by dissolving or dispersing the ion channel modulating compound in the proper medium. Absoφtion enhancers may also be used to increase the flux ofthe compound across the skin. The rate of flux maybe controlled. Examples of ways of controlling the rate of flux include but are not limited to rate controlling membranes or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
[0266] Ophthalmic formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound include, but are not limited to, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like.
[0267] Formulations of ion channel modulating compounds for parenteral administration may have one or more ion channel modulating compound in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use. Parenteral formulations may contain antioxidants; buffers or solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood ofthe intended subject; bacteriostats; suspending; or thickening agents.
[0268] Injectable depot formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound can be made by forming microencapsulated matrices ofthe ion channel modulating compounds in biodegradable polymers. Examples of biodegradable polymers include, but are not limited to polylactide-polyglycolide, poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). The ratio of ion channel modulating compound to polymer and the nature ofthe particular polymer employed can affect the rate of ion channel modulating compound released. Depot injectable formulations can also be prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions. [0269] Proper fluidity of liquid, suspension and other formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds can be maintained by the use of coating materials such as lecithin; by the maintenance ofthe required particle size in the case of dispersions; or by the use of surfactants.
[0270] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include anti- contamination agents for the prevention of microorganism contamination. Anti- contamination agents may include but are not limited to antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. [0271] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound may also be sterilized by, for example, by filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incoφorating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid formulations which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile medium immediately before use or formulation.
[0272] Formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds may also include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like.
[0273] In some cases it is desirable to prolong the effect ofthe ion channel modulating compound. This may be accomplished in formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compound that slow the absoφtion ofthe ion channel modulating compound from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amoφhous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absoφtion ofthe ion channel modulating compound then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absoφtion of a parenterally administered drug form can be accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Prolonged absoφtion formulations for injection can include agents which delay absoφtion including but not limited to aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
[0274] Ion channel modulating compounds can be given per se or as formulations containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of ion channel modulating compound.
Immediate Release and Controlled Release formulations
[0275] The ion channel modulating compounds described herein may be formulated as immediate release (IR) or controlled release (CR) tablets.
[0276] In one version, the ion channel modulating compound formulation contains (1R,2R)-
2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (C2oH3ιN0 .HCl). This compound is orally bioavailable in humans and animals (dog, rat and monkey). The drug is rapidly absorbed, and has a linear PK in humans following a 10-minute infusion. The half-life ofthe drug in healthy volunteers has been shown to be approximately 2 hours compared to 3-4 hours in patients with recent onset AF.
[0277] The drug is highly soluble in citrate solution (143 mg/mL), and has a pH of 3.2 in water, and a pKa of 8.32. It is anhydrous, and is stable under long term and accelerated conditions (ICH). Both IR and CR forms ofthe drug may be formulated so that a final dosage form exhibits many desirable properties including, but not limited to: good tabletting characteristics (e.g., good flow, compression, appearance, weight variation, hardness, friability, content uniformity and dissolution rate properties), good bioavailability profiles (e.g., 12-hour in- vivo drug release profile for the CR tablet), excellent stress and long-term stability, satisfies USP and EU standards, small tablet size, simple but efficient and cost- effective processing, and CR and TR tablets may have approximately the same weight and appearance.
a. Continuous Release tablets of (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (C20H31NO4.HCI)
CR tablets may be made by incoφorating the drug within a matrix systems, including but not limited to: a hydrophilic matrix system, a hydrophobic (plastic matrix system), a hydrophilic/hydrophobic matrix system, a fat wax system, and a film-coated particulate system.
[0278] Hydrophilic matrix systems show uniform and constant drug diffusion from a tablet prepared with a hydrophilic, gelling excipient after it is placed in an aqueous environment. Drug release is controlled by a gel diffusional barrier which is formed. The process is usually a combination of gel hydration, drug diffusion, and gel erosion.
Hydrophobic (plastic) matrix systems utilize inert, insoluble polymers and copolymers to form a porous skeletal structure in which the drug is embedded. Controlled drug release is effected by diffusion of drug through the capillary wetting channels and pores ofthe matrix, and by erosion of the matrix itself.
[0279] Hydrophilic/ hydrophobic matrix systems utilize a combination of hydrophilic and hydrophobic polymers that forms a soluble/insoluble matrix in which the drug is embedded. Drug release is by pore and gel diffusion as well as tablet matrix erosion. The hydrophilic polymer is expected to delay the rate of gel diffusion. [0280] In Fat-wax matrix systems, the drug is incoφorated in a hot melt of a fat-wax matrix, solidified sized and compressed with appropriate tablet ingredients. Controlled release ofthe drug is effected by pore diffusion and erosion ofthe fat-wax matrix. The addition of a surfactant as a wicking agent helps water penetration ofthe matrix to cause erosion. Film-coated particulate systems include time-release granulations, prepared by extrusion- spheronization process or by conventional granulation process that have been film-coated to produce differing species of controlled release particles with specific drug release characteristics. [0281] Controlled release particles may be compressed together with appropriate tabletting excipients to produce tablets with the desired controlled release profile. Drug release is by particle erosion in either acid (gastric) or alkaline (intestinal) pH. [0282] Excipients that may be used for the above CR matrix systems are listed in tables 1 to 5 below. Outlined are the chemical and brand names, compendial status, function, and range of use levels.
Table 1: Excipients for Hydrophilic Matrix System
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Table 2: Excipients for Hydrophobic Matrix System
Figure imgf000105_0002
Table 3: Excipients for Fax-Wax Matrix System
Figure imgf000105_0003
Figure imgf000106_0001
Table 4: Excipients for HydrophilicHydrophobic Matrix System
Figure imgf000106_0002
Table 5: Excipients for Film-Coated Particulate System
Figure imgf000107_0001
CR formulations ofthe drug may be processed by methods including but not limited to: direct compression (dry blend of drug with flowable excipients followed by compression), wet granulation (application of a binder solution to powder blend, followed by drying, sizing, blending and compression), dry granulation or compaction (densifying the drug or drug/powder blend through slugging or with a compactor to obtain flowable, compressible granules), fat-wax mot melt granulation (embedding of drug in molten fatty alcohols, followed by cooling, sizing, blending and compression), and film-coating of particulates (dry blend, wet granulation, kneading, extrusion, spheronization, drying, film-coating, followed by blending of differing; species of film-coated spheres, and compression). [0283] In one version, a 100 mg CR formulation containing fillers, a glidant, lubricants and a hydrophilic polymer is made by direct compression. In this formulation, the drug is mixed with Starch 1500 in a small polyethylene (PE) bag then passed through a # 30 mesh screen. The screened mix is then transferred to its original PE bag along with Prosolv SMCC90, Lactose Fast Flo and Methoeel K4M and mixed for 2 minutes. A portion (e.g. lg) of this blend is then mixed with Magnesium Stearate and Stearic Acid in a PE bag, transferred back to the bulk blend via a #30 mesh screen and blended for 1 minute. Tablets may be compressed with a suitable punch (e.g., a 9 mm punch) on a single punch press to obtain a tablet hardness of 7-12 KN. This formulation is described in the table below.
Table 6: 100 mg CR Tablet Formulation
Figure imgf000108_0001
[0284] Compositions of alternative formulations of CR tablets such as the hydrophobic and hot melt (solid dispersion) formulations are shown in the table below. The hydrophilic composition is also shown for comparison. Table 7: Proposed Initial Compositions for CR Matrix Tablets
Figure imgf000108_0002
Figure imgf000109_0001
♦ Tablet weight: 300 mg ** Tablet weight: 225 mg b. IR tablets of(lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (C20H31NO4.HCI) [0285] IR tablets ofthe drug may be formulated by compounding the drag with appropriate, fillers, binders, glidants, disintegrants and lubricants that give a satisfactory tabletting characteristics and subsequent rapid disintegration and dissolution ofthe tablets. Excipients useful for IR tabletting are listed in the following table. Outlined are the chemical and brand names, compendial status, function, and range of use levels: Table 8: Excipients for IR Prototype Formulations
Figure imgf000109_0002
Figure imgf000110_0001
[0286] TR tablets ofthe drug may be made by: direct compression (dry blend of drug with flowable excipients followed by compression), wet granulation (application of a binder solution to powder blend, followed by drying, sizing, blending and compression), dry granulation or compadtion (densifying API of API/powder blend through slugging or with a compactor to obtain flowable, compressible granules), or a combination of these steps. Granules ofthe drug are sized, blended with the appropriate excipients and compressed in tablets. [0287] In one version, a 100 mg IR formulation containing basic IR excipients, i.e., fillers, a glidant, a disintegrant and lubricants may be made by direct compression. This formulation is blended in small PE bags and subsequently compressed manually on a single punch bench tablet press with an appropriate tablet punch. The ion channel modulating drug is mixed with Starch 1500 in a small polyethylene (PE) bag then passed through a # 30 mesh screen. The screened mix is then transferred to its original PE bag along with Prosolv SMCC90, Lactose Fast Flo and Explotab and mixed for 2 minutes. A portion (e.g. lg) of this blend is then mixed with Magnesium Stearate and Stearic Acid in a PE bag, transfened back to the bulk blend via a #30 mesh screen and blended for 1 minute. Tablets are compressed with a suitable punch (e.g., a 9 mart punch) on a single punch press to obtain a tablet hardness of 7- 12 KN. The formulation is described in the table below. Table 9: 100 g IR Tablet Formulation
Figure imgf000110_0002
Figure imgf000111_0001
c. In-vitro Dissolution ofIR and CR Tablets [0288] The release profile of active agent (such as the ion channel modulating compound) and any additives maybe empirically determined in vitro by examining the dissolution ofthe tablet over time. A USP approved method for dissolution or release test can be used to measure the rate of release in vitro (USP 24; NF 19 (2000) pp. 1941-1951). For example, a weighed tablet of tlie drug (e.g. (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)-Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride) is added to a measured volume of a solution containing 0.9% NaCl in water, where the solution volume will be such that the active agent concentration after release is less than 20% of saturation. The mixture is maintained at 37°C and stirred or shaken slowly to maintain the tablet in suspension. The release ofthe dissolved drug as a function of time may then be followed by various methods known in the art, such as spectrophotometrically, HPLC, mass spectroscopy, and the like, until the solution concentration becomes constant or until greater than 90% ofthe active agent has been released. [0289] In one variation, various TR and CR tabletted formulations of (lR,2R)-2-[(3R Hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (described below) may have in vivo cumulative percentage release profiles the same as or substantially the same as shown in Figures 2 and 3. Figure 2 shows that release profile (percent cumulative release over time) for the TR formulation ofthe ion channel modulating compound. This H formulation is described in Table 10, Part I below. More than 80% ofthe drug in the IR. form has dissolved by fifteen minutes. [0290] Release profiles for different CR formulations show that the CR formulations dissolve in hours rather than minutes (Figure 3). Figure 3 shows a comparison of four different hydrophilic CR tablets, a hydrophilic non-cellulose tablet, a hot-melt wax tablet, and two hydrophobic tablets. The formulations of these CR forms are given in Table 10, Part I and Table 10, Part E. Table 10 Part I: IR and Hydrophilic CR tablet formulations
Tablet Type:
Ingredient/tablet strength: mg/tablet- %
Ion Channel Modulating Drug (C20H31NO4.HCI) Starch pregelatinized 1500 Silicified Microcrystalline Cellulose -Prosolv SMCC90 Lactose Fast Flo Sodium Starch Glycolate -Explotab Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose- Methocel K4M Cetostearyl Alcohol - Kalcol6850 Polyethylene Glycol 8000 Kollidon SR Ethyl Cellulose Standard 4 Eudragit RSPO Anhydrous Emcompress Stearic Acid Magnesium Stearate-Non-Bovine
Total Weight: (mg)
Figure imgf000112_0001
Table 10 part E: CR Formulations
Tablet Type:
Ingredient/tablet strength: mg/tablet- % n Channel Modulating Drug (C20H31NO4.HCI) Starch pregelatinized 1500 Silicified Microcrystalline Cellulose -Prosolv SMCC90 Lactose Fast Flo Sodium Starch Glycolate -Explotab Hydroxypropyl Methylcellulose- Methocel K4M Cetostearyl Alcohol - Kalcol6850 Polyethylene Glycol 8000 Kollidon SR Ethyl Cellulose Standard 4 Eudragit RSPO Anhydrous Emcompress Stearic Acid Magnesium Stearate-Non-Bovine
Total Weight: ( g)
Figure imgf000113_0001
Combinations of ion channel modulating compounds and biomedical devices [0291] The ion channel modulating compounds herein may also be used in conjunction or combination with biomedical devices, including but not limited to applying the ion channel modulating compound as a component of a biomedical device, such as coating the ion channel modulating compound on a device to achieve an extended, immediate, or controlled release; administering the ion channel modulating compound in coordination with a treatment such as administering pre- or post-operatively to a subject; or releasing the ion channel modulating compound from a biomedical device as needed, such as release from a "smart" pacemaker or cardiac sensor.
[0292] Rechargeable or biodegradable devices could deliver controlled release ofthe ion channel modulating compounds to a subject. Such devices include but are not limited to slow release polymeric devices for the controlled delivery of drugs, for example proteinaceous biopharmaceuticals; and osmotic pumps and osmotic tables. A variety of biocompatible polymers (including hydrogels), including both biodegradable and non-degradable polymers, could form an implant for the sustained release ofthe ion channel modulating compound at a particular site, including a target site. An implantable or external pump system could also be used to deliver ion channel modulating compounds. Ion channel modulating compounds could also be delivered via incoφoration as a coating onto a biomedical device, such as an implantable device (e.g. a heart valve).
[0293] Implantable systems incoφorating the ion channel modulating system could be implanted in a subject anywhere that would allow beneficial therapeutic effect, including but not limited to implantation in heart tissue or pericardial sacs. [0294] Biomedical devices appropriate for use in conjunction with the ion channel modulating compounds described here could be used to treat or prevent cardiovascular disorders. For example, formulations ofthe ion channel modulating compounds could be used in combination or conjunction with angioplastic balloons, cardiac monitors, stents (including drug eluting stents), defϊbriUators, catheters and heart valves, vascular grafts, pacemaker leads, guide wires, and the like which are placed into the blood vessels or the heart or nearby tissue for puφoses of monitoring or repair.
[0295] On-demand release forms incoφorating an ion channel modulating compound can be used for controlled release. Hybrid devices delivering an ion channel modulating compound could incoφorate release based on sensing concentration of drug, a biological marker (e.g. enzyme level), or physiological need. In one embodiment, sensing devices could be pacemakers and/or implantable defibrillators modified to release drug upon demand. Drug release could also be regulated and/or monitored by computer control.
EXAMPLES [0296] The following examples demonstrate the methods described in this application. These examples are not intended to limit the scope ofthe described methods and formulations and are included for illustrative puφoses.
Example 1 - Termination of atrial fibrillation - Step dosing TV study in human subjects [0297] A prospective double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized, dose-response trial was conducted. The compound used in these studies is (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, which has structural formula
Figure imgf000115_0001
[0298] To be eligible, patients had to have a rhythm of sustained atrial fibrillation with a duration of 3-72 hours at the time of randomization. Patients were managed in accordance with ACC/AHA/ESC anticoagulation practice guidelines. Patients > 21 years of age were eligible. All patients had to be hemodynamically stable (systolic blood pressure of 90-160 mm Hg with diastolic blood pressure <95 mm Hg).
[0299] Patients were excluded for the following reasons: female patients of child-bearing potential; weight >300 lb; history of long QT syndrome, torsade de pointes or an uncorrected QT interval of >450 ms; QRS > 120 ms; myocardial infarction, symptoms of angina, congestive heart failure, or stroke within the previous 3 months; cardiac surgery in the previous 6 months; bradycardia (<50 bpm) or sick sinus syndrome unless controlled by a pacemaker; digoxin toxicity; or other reversible cause of atrial fibrillation (such as hyperthyroidism, pulmonary embolism, alcohol intoxication, acute pericarditis); Wolff- Parkinson-White syndrome; COPD requiring daily-bronchodilation therapy; cyanotic or other significant congenital heart disease; concurrent treatment with known QT prolonging drags or class I or IE anti-arrhythmic agents (unless the medication was discontinued more than five half-lives before enrollment); oral amiodarone in the prior 6 months or intravenous amiodarone in the prior month; or end stage diseases. No alcohol, caffeine, herbal remedies or smoking were permitted during the study. Pre-enrollment treatment with β-adrenergic blocking agents, calcium antagonists, and digoxin for control of ventricular rate were permitted. [0300] Eligible patients were approached and provided informed written consent. To enter the trial, all patients had to demonstrate normal serum electrolytes (serum potassium not < 3.5 mEq/L, magnesium not < 1.5 mEq/L), seram creatinine of 1.8 mg/dL or greater, hemoglobin not < 9 g/dL in women or < 11 g/dL in men, and liver enzymes less than 1.5x maximal normal values.
[0301] Patients were randomized to one of three groups and in each group received up to two 10-minute intravenous infusions, separated by 30 minutes. Infusions were placebo followed by placebo, 0.5 mg/kg followed by 1.0 mg/kg of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, or 2.0 mg followed by 3.0 mg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (follow-on dose, efficacy dependent). Doses for patients weighing >113 kg were capped as if the patient weight was 113 kg. If the anhythmia did not terminate or persisted 30 minutes after the end ofthe first infusion, the second infusion was administered. Outcomes: Efficacy outcomes were adjudicated by the steering committee (DR, BHR, AME) prior to unblinding of treatment allocation; disagreements were resolved following second review and consensus. The primary efficacy end point of this study was the termination of atrial fibrillation. Success was defined as termination for any length of time during infusion or 30 minutes after initiation of infusion. Secondary endpoints included: number of patients in normal sinus rhythm (NSR) at 0.5, 1 and 24 hours after last infusion, as well as the time to conversion.
[0302] A Holter rhythm strip continuously monitored ECG, vital signs (blood pressure and heart rate) and 02 saturation were recorded every 2 minutes from the start of infusion to 5 minutes after, as well as at 15, 30, 60, 120, 240, 360, and 480 minutes and at discharge and 1- week follow-up. 12-lead ECGs were obtained before dosing and every minute during infusion to 5 minutes after, as well as at 15, 30, 60, 120, 240, 360, and 480 minutes and at discharge, 24 hours and 1-week follow-up, and at the time of arrhythmia termination or significant rhythm changes. ECGs were inteφreted by individual investigators and independently verified by a core lab cardiologist blinded to study treatment. Venous blood samples were drawn for (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma concentrations at 0, 15, 30, 120, 240, 480 minutes, discharge and at atrial fibrillation termination or significant adverse events. The infusion was discontinued if the arrhythmia terminated after 1 minute of verification, systolic blood pressure decreased to <85 mm Hg or increased > 190 mm Hg, HR < 50 bpm, intolerable side effects or any change in rhythm or atrioventricular conduction occurred that in the investigator's opinion was a threat to patient safety, a new bundle-branch block developed, QRS increased >50%, uncorrected QT increased to 550 ms or > 25% of baseline or any polymoφhic VT was noted. If atrial fibrillation persisted past 1 hour after the last infusion, pacing or electrical cardioversion was permitted. The use of other antiarrhythmic agents was discouraged until 12 hours after the (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride infusion, unless the investigator considered it necessary to restore sinus rhythm earlier.
[0303] The sample size was based on estimates of a placebo conversion rate of 35%, (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxyρyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride conversion rate of 60%, an alpha of 0.05 and a beta- of 0.9. A priori, up to 20 patients were to be recruited in each group to detect this difference, with an anticipated need of at least 18 evaluable patients per group.
[0304] All patients who received study medication were included in the safety analysis, and 55 patients were evaluated for efficacy. Data are presented as mean ± SD, median with interquartile range (IQR), all tests were performed as two sided and 95% CI were produced; p < 0.05 was considered statistically significant unless stated otherwise. Analysis ofthe relationship between termination of atrial fibrillation and treatment was performed using a chi-square analysis. In cases of small cell frequencies, the Fisher's exact test was used. A Cochran-Armitage test statistic with table scores was used to test the ascending dose evaluation of efficacy.
[0305] Patients who were electrically cardioverted were not evaluated for secondary endpoints. The time to conversion from the start ofthe first infusion was analyzed by the Cox regression method of event time analysis and one-way ANOVA. Assessment ofthe significance of time point values and mean change from baseline to each follow-up reading of ECG intervals (QRS, QT, QTc), blood pressures, and heart rates were made within dose groups using paired t tests, and comparisons among dose groups were made using a one-way ANOVA. [0306] Fifty-six patients with recent onset (new or recunent) atrial fibrillation were administered blinded treatment Ofthe 9 patients randomized but not treated, 6 spontaneously converted to NSR and did not receive drug, 1 patient converted to atrial flutter, 1 patient withdrew consent and 1 was a screening error. The treatment allocation was as follows: placebo/placebo, 20; 0.5 mg/kg + 1.0 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, 18; and 2.0 mg/kg + 3.0 mg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride, 18.
[0307] The mean age ofthe patients was 61 years (range 24-88 years), 61% were male. The average duration ofthe anhythmia was 17.8±13 hours in the placebo group, 23.6±22 hours and 24.7±20 hours in the RSD-1 and RSD-2 dosing groups, respectively. Overall, 62% of patients had at least one previous episode of atrial fibrillation. Baseline clinical characteristics were similar across groups except that patients in the placebo group tended to more frequently report atrial fibrillation in the past than in the (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride dosed groups. [0308] Adverse Events: A total of 39 patients experienced 122 adverse events (AEs) over the course ofthe study, with a similar incidence of AEs among the three treatment groups. The majority of AEs were of grade 1 (mild) or grade 2 (moderate) intensity. There were 4 AEs that occurred in 2 patients considered either definitely or probably related to study drug. Both patients were in the RSD-2 dose group: one patient reported paraesthesia, and one patient reported paraesthesia, nausea, and hypotension all of mild intensity. [0309] The most common AEs experienced in this study were cardiac disorders, reported by 7 patients (35.0%) in the Placebo group, 4 patients (22.2%) in the RSD-1 group, and 3 patients (16.7%) in the RSD-2 group. In addition to the serious adverse events discussed below, the cardiac disorders in the placebo group included two patients with ventricular tachycardia and a patient with ventricular extrasystoles. Ventricular extrasystoles were also seen in two patients and sinus bradycardia in one patient ofthe low dose group. Ventricular extrasystoles were seen in two patients and sinus bradycardia in another patient in the RSD-2 group. Other common AEs occurring with a similar frequency among treatment groups were nervous system disorders, general disorders, investigations, and infections and infestations. [0310] Serious AEs: Serious AEs were reported in 5 patients (4 patients ofthe Placebo group and 1 patient ofthe RSD-1 group). There were no SAEs that were considered related to study drug, and all SAEs resolved either during the course ofthe study or during the follow-up period. There were no instances of polymoφhic ventricular tachycardia in the study. [0311] A transient cerebral ischemic attack occuπed 1 day after conversion in a placebo treated patient with a therapeutic INR at the time of conversion. The remaining serious AEs in the placebo group consisted of severe bradycardia and hypotension immediately following conversion in one patient, pulmonary edema in another patient and recurrent atrial fibrillation in the final patient with a serious AE. One patient in the RSD-1 group experienced VF induced by an asynchronous discharge during an electrical cardioversion attempt performed 1 hour after the second infusion.
[0312] The cumulative atrial fibrillation termination within 30 minutes of infusion was 61.1% (11 of 18 patients) after 2 + 3 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride infusion (the "RSO-2" group), 11.1% (2 of 18 patients) after 0.5 + 1 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyπolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (the "RSD-1 group") and 5.3% (1 of 19 patients) after placebo + placebo. Paired comparisons indicated a statistically significant difference (p = 0.0003; Figure 4) between placebo (5.3%) and the RSD-2 group (61.1%). There was no significant difference (p = 0.51) in the success rates between the RSD-1 group and placebo. Of the 11 successful terminations in the RSD-2 group, 18 terminated on the first infusion (44.4% or 8/11 = 73%).
[0313] The number of patients in SR at 30 minutes post infusion was 56% (10 of 18 patients, p=0.0008) in the RSD-2 group, compared to 11% (2 of 18 patients) in the RSD-1 group (p = 0.51) and 5% (1 of 19 patients) in the placebo group. The number of efficacy evaluable patients iii NSR at 1 hour post infusion was 53% (9 of 17 patients, p = 0.0014) in the RSD-2 group, and 11% (2 of 18 patients, p = 0.51) in the RSD-1 group, compared to 5% (1 of 19 patients) in the placebo group. Patients in NSR (excluding those electrically cardioverted) at 24 hours post infusion was 79% (11 of 14 patients, p = 0.14) in the RSD-2 group, and 56% (5 of 9 patients, p=0.80) in the RSD-1 group compared to 50% (5 of 10 patients) in the placebo group.
[0314] The median time to conversion to NSR from the start ofthe first infusion in the 11 responders in the RSD-2 group was 14 minutes (range, 3 to 871 minutes; p = 0.016) compared to the 5 spontaneous responders in the placebo group with a median time of 1 2 minutes (range, 58 to 1119 minutes). The median time to conversion to NSR from the start of the first infusion in the 5 eventual responders in the RSD-1 group was 166 minutes (range, 1 to 332 minutes; p = 0.886 vs. placebo).
[0315] The median time to termination of atrial fibrillation was 11 minutes after start ofthe first infusion (range, 3 to 58 minutes) in the RSD-2 group. In fact, all the responders in this group reached primary end-point during drug infusion or within 10 minutes ofthe last infusion. One ofthe 11 responders in this group terminated AF, but went into atrial flutter and subsequently converted to NSR 14.5 hours later.
[0316] Within the study period (24 hours) electrical cardioversion was attempted in 9 of 19 (47%) placebo treated, 9 of 18 (50%) RSD-1 treated and 4 of 18 (22%) RSD-2 treated patients and was successful in 8 (89%), 9 (100%) and 4 (100%) patients, respectively. [0317] Mean peak (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma levels were 5.8 μg/mL (range: 4.0 to 8.6 μg/mL) in the patients that received both the 2.0 and 3.0 mg/kg infusions of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrτolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride and 1.9 μg/mL (range: 0.1 to 3.4 μg/mL) in those that received both 0.5 and 1.0 mg/kg (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride. (Figure 5) Maximum plasma levels were seen at the end ofthe second infusion. Plasma drug levels at 24 hours post infusion were below the limit of quantitation (5 ng/ml) in the majority of patients who received RSD-1. Similarly, negligible plasma levels were seen at 24 hours in the RSD-2 group; mean plasma levels were 0.017 μg/mL (range: <0.005 to 0.028 μg/mL).
[0318] In those patients that responded to (atrial fibrillation converted) and received only the 2 mg/kg infusion, mean peak plasma levels at the end of infusion were 2.6 μg/mL (range: 1.4 to 4.5 μg/mL). The median plasma level at the time of atrial fibrillation conversion in these patients was 1.3 μg/mL (range: 1.1 to 3.5 μg/mL). The mean terminal elimination half life in these patients was 3.1 hours (range: 1.7 - 5.4 hours).
[0319] This dose-finding study demonstrated that the upper dose of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (2+3 mg/kg) rapidly and effectively terminated atrial fibrillation compared to lower dose (IR, 2R)- 2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride and placebo. (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride rapidly converted atrial fibrillation patients, often during the infusion phase. There were no serious adverse events associated with (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyπolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride at plasma levels up to 8.6 μg/ml, and observed SAEs were more common in the placebo group. In contrast to other antiaπhythmic drugs used for conversion of acute atrial fibrillation, there were no instances of drug related pro-anhythmia. While these initial findings will require confirmation in larger scale clinical trials, this safety profile coupled with an efficacious and rapid onset confirms that (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride is a promising new agent for the medical conversion of acute atrial fibrillation.
Example 2 — Pharmacokinetic evaluation of oral dosing in human subjects. [0320] This prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind, ascending dose study was conducted to assess safety and oral absoφtion of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in healthy volunteers. Safety and tolerance were monitored through 12-lead ECG, Hotter and telemetry recordings and monitoring of clinical observations, vital signs, clinical chemistries and haematology. The pharmacokinetics was assessed through measurement of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride levels in both urine and plasma.
[0321] The Cmax in fasted volunteers was 1.8 ± 0.4 μg/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose and 1.9 ± 0.5 μg/ml after the 7.5 mg/kg p.o. dose. In fed volunteers, the Cmax was 1.3 ± 0.7 μg/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose. There were no statistically significant differences in Cmax, time to maximum plasma levels (Tmax), or bioavailability (F%) between the groups. The oral bioavailability in the three dosing groups were found to be 71 + 21% (mean + s.d.), 69 + 50% and 58 ± 19%, for 5 mg/kg fasted, 5 m/kg fed and 7.5 mg kg fasted respectively, indicating that (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride is rapidly and extensively absorbed after oral administration. The plasma levels achieved were well within the therapeutic range (median plasma level at ED50 = 1.3 μg/ml) as observed in the recently completed intravenous trial. [0322] (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was found to be well-tolerated in oral doses of up to 7.5 mg/kg. Vital signs, BP and lab results remained normal in all subjects. There were no changes in QT or any ECG intervals observed in any ofthe dosing groups.
[0323] This study was a prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind, ascending dose bioavailability study of an orally administered aqueous formulation of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in healthy volunteers. Pharmacokinetic assessment and safety monitoring endpoints were evaluated. All doses were administered as a single oral dosing solution. [0324] This study was conducted to determine the oral absoφtion and bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (relative to intravenous administration in a previous study, MDS Pharma Services, Project 26450, August 2001) in normal healthy human volunteers. The study was also conducted to determine the safety and tolerability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride given as a single oral dose of 5.0 or 7.5 mg/kg in fasted and fed (5.0 mg/kg only) normal healthy human volunteers.
[0325] The study was a prospective, randomized, placebo-controlled, double-blind ascending single-dose dose assessment ofthe oral bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride. Dose ranging covered two doses (5.0 and 7.5 mg/kg) and involved 24 volunteers. The study was conducted in 3 dosing blocks. After completion of each dosing block and assessment of clinically significant findings, the blind was broken and (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride plasma levels were analyzed prior to continuation ofthe next dosing block. Interim safety review meetings were held to review all ofthe available data after dosing blocks 1 and 2. [0326] All subjects were admitted to the study facility the evening before dosing and were monitored for 24-hours in the facility post-dose with a 1-week +/- 3 days follow-up visit. Volunteers received a single dose (150 ml solution) of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride or placebo given on one occasion. Tlie first 8 subjects were randomized to receive either placebo (n=2) or to receive a single oral administration of 5.0 mg/kg oral dose (n=6). The first 8 subjects were fasted from midnight prior to dosing until four hours post-dose. The second group of subjects were assessed at the same dose (5 mg/kg) with fed subjects (n=6) and placebo (n=2). A standard breakfast was administered concomitant with dosing. The third group of 8 subjects were randomized to receive either placebo (n=2) or to receive a single oral administration of 7.5 mg/kg (n=6). These subjects were fasted from midnight prior to dosing until four hours post-dose.
[0327] The subjects for this study were normal, healthy males and females as defined by the inclusion and exclusion criteria described below: Inclusion Criteria a) Females and males aged 18 between 60 years. Females must be non-pregnant and surgically sterile or free of menses for more than two years. If free of menses females must be using an effective form of birth control during the study (from pre-screening) until three months after the follow-up visit. Methods of birth control considered to be effective would include hormonal contraception (the pill), an intrauterine device (IUD), condoms in combination with a spermicidal cream, total abstinence or sterilization. Males will be advised to refrain from unprotected -.. sexual intercourse (i.e., without adequate contraceptive method) until three months t. after the follow-up screening). b) No clinically important abnormal physical findings at the screening examination. c) Normal ECG. d) Body weight between 45 to 95 kg and a body mass index of 18-27 kg/m2. e) Able to communicate well with the investigator and to comply with the requirements ofthe entire study. f) Provision of written informed consent to participate as shown by a signature on the volunteer consent form.
Exclusion Criteria a) 90 mmHg > systolic blood pressure > 160 mmHg, or, 65 mm Hg > diastolic pressure > 95 mmHg. These will be measured 3 times after sitting for 3 minutes and averaged to determine a baseline BP. b) 50 bpm ≥pulse rate >90 bpm. c) PR > 0.21 sec, QRS > 0.11 sec, QTCB > 0.430 sec for men and QTCB > 0.450 sec for women. d) Participation in any other investigational drug study within 60 days preceding the start ofthe study, or participation in more than 3 other drug studies (for men) / more than 2 other drug studies (for women) in the past 10 months. e) Administration of prescription or over-the-counter medication during the period 0 to 5 days before entry to the study including aspirin. (Exceptions to this criterion include the use of hormone replacement therapy or oral contraceptives by female subjects.) f) Administration of antacids, gastric reflux, anti-ulcer or gastrointestinal pro-kinetic medications in the period of 0 to 30 days before entry to the study unless agreed upon by Sponsor and Investigator. g) Existence of any surgical or medical condition which, in the judgment ofthe clinical investigator, might interfere with the absoφtion, distribution, metabolism or excretion ofthe drug. h) Donation of blood within 60 days preceding the start ofthe study, or, donation of more than 1.5 liters of blood (for men) / more than 1.0 liters of blood (for women) in the past.10 months. (The exception to this criterion is, blood sampling for screening, admission and baseline tests for this study is permitted.) i) Loss of greater than 250 ml of blood within 60 days preceding the start ofthe study. j) Known serious adverse reaction or hypersensitivity to any drug. k) Inability to communicate or co-operate with the investigator because of a language problem, poor mental development or impaired cerebral function.
1) Positive drug screen, positive Ab to HTN, HCV, and positive Ag to HBV m) History of drug or alcohol abuse. n) Abnormal screening test results (clinical chemistry, hematology or urinalysis). o) Family history of QT abnormalities or congenital QT syndrome. p) Any herbal or alternate medicines during the period 0 to 5 days before entry to the study. q) Frequent use of antacids r) History of gastro-intestinal or cardiovascular problems. s) Any other condition that, in the opinion of the clinical investigator, would make it unwise to enter the subject into the study.
[0328] No alcohol, caffeine or smoking were permitted from admission to the study facility to discharge. No herbal remedies, medicines or alternative medicines were permitted from admission to the study facility to discharge with the exception of aspirin/paracetamol which was permitted from 4 h post-dose onwards.
[0329] Dosing was to be terminated if any volunteer that exhibited any significant clinical signs (e.g. tremors) or if the following limits were reached: PR > 0.24 s; QTcB > 0.500s; Pulse Rate < 40 bpm; Systolic BP <80 mm Hg (confirmed by three measurements over three minutes); Evidence of bundle branch block or other serious conduction disturbance. [0330] The subject population included men (63%) and women in the age range of 18 - 60 years. Subject body weight ranged from 59.1 to 89.3 kg. Subjects meeting entry criteria and signing informed consent forms were enrolled in the study. Each subject was assessed clinically pre-dose and underwent clinical and pharmacokinetic evaluation during and after dosing. Each subject enrolled in the study was characterized for cytochrome P450 2D6 expression by genotyping using a blood sample.
[0331] The study drug was administered in a volume of 150 mL by oral administration. If drug/placebo was administered to fed subjects, then drug/placebo was administered to subjects with a standard breakfast. Subjects remained sitting during drug administration and it was encouraged that they remained sitting for approximately 4 hours post-dose. Telemetry monitoring was conducted from baseline until at least 4 hours post-dose. Vital signs measurements including pulse rate, respiration rate, blood pressure and oxygen saturation were taken at the following timepoints: screening; admission; pre-dose; immediately following dosing; 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration; at follow-up visit; and in the event of an SAE (none occurred). 12-lead ECGs were recorded at the following timepoints: screening; admission; pre-dose; immediately following dosing; 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration; at follow-up visit; and in the event of an SAE (none occuned). ECG's were inteφreted by a board-certified cardiologist selected by the Sponsor. Baseline and screening 12-lead ECGs were recorded three times consecutively after subject had been sitting for 10 minutes. The ECG recording with the median ofthe three QTcB interval measurements was used as the ECG for that timepoint. Blood (5 mL) for pharmacokinetic analysis were drawn at the following timepoints via venipuncture or sampling cannula into lithium heparin tubes: pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 24 hours after drug/placebo administration and in the event of an SAE (none occurred). Pharmacokinetic (PK) parameters for each subject were calculated using WinNonlin (Pharsight Coφ., Palo Alto, California, USA). A non-compartmental model was used to calculate parameter estimates. The oral bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was calculated using the area under the curves (AUCs) after oral administration compared to the AUCs obtained after iv administration in a previously completed study (Phase I trial report). Urine was collected each time the subject voided. After dosing specimens were collected over the periods; 0-4 hours, 4-8 hours and 8 hours - discharge. Clinical chemistry, hematology, and urinalysis at screening, admission, at 1 hour post-dose and at discharge. Hotter monitoring continued for up to 24 hours post-dose. Hotter monitors were read at a central reading centre. The nature of any adverse event, its time of onset, its duration and severity, action taken, if any, and the investigator's opinion as to whether it was related to the test drag was recorded on the AE Form. Duration ofthe follow up of an adverse event was until recovery from the event was evident, or until the event was judged medically stable or permanent. Subjects were monitored in the study facility until all adverse events resolved. [0332] The study drag showed rapid and extensive absoφtion after a single oral dose in both fasted and fed subjects (Table 11 and Figure 6). The majority of subjects achieved maximal plasma levels (Cma ) within 30-60 minutes of dosing. The Cmaχ in fasted subjects was 1.8 ± 0.4 μg/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose and 1.3 ± 0.7 μg/ml after the 5 mg/kg p.o. dose in fed subjects . The Cmax in fasted subjects was 1.9 ± 0.5 μg/ml after the 1.6 mg/kg p.o. dose. There were no statistically significant differences in Cm3X, time to maximum plasma levels ( max), or bioavailability (F%) between the groups. One subject with slow clearance and a bioavailability of approximately 240% (#05) was excluded from the bioavailability calculations.
Table 11. PK and Bioavailability Results 5 mg/kg 5 mg/kg 7.5 mg/kg fasted fed fasted Cmax (μg/ml) 1.8+0.4 1.3+0.7 1.9+0.5 Tmax (min) 55±35 70+41 45+16 AUCall 470+330 330+250 290+70 AUCinf 490+350 340+240 300+80 AUC/dose 98+71 67+49 57+19 F% 71+21* 69+50 58+19 (min-max) (46-105)* (15-139) (33-89)
* excluding one outlier (F=240%)
[0333] The oral bioavailability in the three dosing groups were found to be 71 ± 21% (mean ± s.d.), 69 + 50% and 58 ± 19%, for 5 mg/kg fasted, 5 m/kg fed and 7.5 mg/kg fasted respectively, indicating that (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride is rapidly and extensively absorbed after oral administration. The plasma levels achieved were well within the therapeutic range (median plasma level at ED50 = 1.3 μg/ml) as observed in the recently completed intravenous studies.
[0334] The study drug was well tolerated at oral doses of 5 - 7.5 mg/kg in normal healthy volunteers. Vital signs, BP and lab results remained normal in all subjects. Almost all ofthe adverse events observed were considered not related to drug and all except one ofthe observations were mild in nature. Single observations of loose stools, bitter taste and a visual disturbance were considered possibly related to drug. A further volunteer reported two episodes of transient paraesthesia ofthe right hand that was also considered possibly related to drag. There were no significant changes in clinical laboratory tests or vital signs. There were no clinically relevant changes observed in QTcB, QT, JT, PR, QRS, or HR intervals and no clinically significant findings found in the Hotter recordings.
Example 3 - Pharmacokinetic evaluation offlR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-P (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in dogs. [0335] In this study, the pharmacokinetics of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in beagle dogs after dosing via oral gavage, intraduodenally (ID) and intracolonically (IC) was investigated Pharmacokinetic parameters such as AUC o-t, Cmax and Tma were determined. The segmental dependence to absoφtion of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolιdinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was also evaluated [0336] Dosing solutions for all routes of administration were prepared using the same procedure as follows: 425 mg of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride (lot#BC-145-39, 99 3% active) was weighed into a precleaned 20 mL glass vial. 21 mLs of water was added and the sample was inverted several times to dissolve all powder At the time of dosing all solutions were clear. [0337] The pharmacokinetics of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dιmethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was evaluated in male beagle dogs ranging in age from 1 to 2 years. All animals were housed one per cage. The animals were fasted for a minimum of 12 hours prior to dosing. Food was returned to the animals at four hours post-dose. Water was withheld for one hour predose and supplied ad libitum at one hour postdose The same six beagle dogs (crossover design) were used for each dosing leg of the study. All animals were dosed on the same day via the same route of administration The numbers ofthe animals and the dosmg regimen are presented in Table 12
Table 12 Study Design
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0002
[0338] Animals were dosed via a chronic intraduodenal or colonic access port or by oral gavage. Blood samples were taken from a foreleg vein via a butterfly catheter at the following time points: Oral gavage, ID and IC: 0 (pre-dose), 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, 240, 360, 480 and 1440 minutes postdose. The blood samples were withdrawn and placed into tubes containing sodium heparin as anticoagulant. Blood samples were then centrifuged at 3,000 φm for 15 minutes at 4°C. [0339] ( 1 , 2R)-2-[(3 R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl] - 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride was extracted from the plasma via solid phase extraction then analyzed by LC/MS/MS. Pharmacokinetic analysis was performed on the plasma concentration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for each individual dog at each time point. The data were subjected to non-compartmental analysis using the pharmacokinetic program WinNonLin v. 4.1 (1). Pharmacokinetic parameters are given in Tables 13, 14, and 15.
Table 13 Pharmacokinetic Parameters of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after Oral Gavage Administration
Figure imgf000129_0001
Figure imgf000130_0001
* Average of N=5, Dog 40 is removed from these averages
Table 14
Pharmacokinetic Parameters of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after Infraduodenal Administration
Figure imgf000131_0001
* Average of N=5, Dog 40 is removed from these averages
Table 15
Pharmacokinetic Parameters of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride after Intracolonic Administration
Figure imgf000131_0002
* Average of N=5, Dog 40 is removed from these averages
[0340] No adverse reactions were observed following oral gavage, infraduodenal or intracolonic adminisfration of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in beagle dogs. [0341] The nominal concentration ofthe dosing solutions was 20 mg/mL. The dosing solutions were analyzed post-dosing and the concentrations were determined to be 16.6, 17.0 and 17.5 mg/mL for the oral gavage, infraduodenal and intracolonic dosing solutions, respectively. These values were used in all calculations. [0342] Average plasma concentrations (± SD) of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l- (3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride for each point and route of adminisfration are shown in Table 16.
Table 16 AVERAGE ± SD (N=6) PLASMA CONCENTRATIONS (NG/ML) OF (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)- hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride
Figure imgf000132_0001
*AU 1440 minute concentrations are reported as N=2. The concentration of (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypynolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochlorideat 1440 minutes for four ofthe animals (18, 37, 44 and 45) was below the lower limit of quantitation. [0343] Figures 7-10 contain graphical representations of the plasma concentration versus time curves for (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in dog. [0344] The average AUClast, Cmax and Tmax were similar for all three routes of (IR, 2R)-2- [(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]- 1 -(3 ,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride administration (Tables 3-6). Compared to other dogs used in the study, dog number 40 had significantly higher AUClast and Cmaχ values at all routes tested (Tables 3-6). The reason for the higher AUClast and Cmaχ values in this animal is not apparent from the available data. The observed higher values could be, at least partially due to lower systemic clearance of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in this dog; however, in the absence of intravenous dosing data, it is not possible to confirm this hypothesis. Due to this uncertainty, the average values for AUClast, Cmax and Tmax were also calculated without data from this animal. [0345] Administration ofthe (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride via oral gavage, infraduodenal or intracolonic routes resulted in similar AUC/dose values (Figure 11) for each dog used in this study. Furthermore, average AUClast, Cmax, Tmax and AUC/dose were also similar for all three routes of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride administration (Figure 10 and Tables 3-6). These data suggest that (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride is absorbed approximately equally following oral gavage, infraduodenal or colonic administration. [0346] All references, patents, and patent applications described in this patent are incoφorated herein by reference to the full extent as though each reference, patent, or patent application had been individually incoφorated by reference.
Example 4 - Pharmacokinetics of and ion channel modulating compound following single oral administration to male beagle dogs after 7 days of 4 daily doses
[0347] The puφose of this study was to investigate the pharmacokinetics of DRUG injection following single oral adminisfration to male beagle dogs after 7 days of 4 daily doses. [0348] The ion channel modulating compound applied was (lR,2R)-2-[(3R)- HydroxypyπolidinyTj-l -(3,4-dimethoxyphenethoxy) cyclohexane monohydrochloride (C oH3]N04.HCl) (referred to as "drug" in this example). This drug was prepared and diluted according to protocol specifications as follows:
Formulation Formulation „ , ,. n ,. „ . ,. _ ,. ,, Formulation Preparation Description Preparation Use Group 1: DRUG injection solution (10 mL) was diluted with 30 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL. Study Day -1 Study Day 1 Group 2: DRUG injection solution (16.5 mL) was diluted with 16.5 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL. Group 1: DRUG injection solution (160 mL) was diluted with Study Days 480 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL Study Day 1 2-5 Group 2: DRUG injection solution (264 mL) was diluted with 264 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL. Group 1: DRUG injection solution (120 mL) was diluted with 360 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL. Study Day 5 j^ W Group 2: DRUG injection solution (198 mL) was diluted with 198 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL. Group 1: DRUG injection solution (11.75 mL) was diluted with 35.25 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 5 mg/mL. Study Day 8 Study Day 9 Group 2: DRUG injection solution (20 mL) was diluted with 20 mL of sterile water at a target concentration of 10 mg/mL.
[0349] Dose formulation samples (0.1 mL) were collected from each formulation prior to dosing on Study Days -1, 1, 4, and 8. Dose formulation samples (0.1 mL) were also collected from each formulation following the first dose of each day (Study Days 1, 2, 5, 7, and 8). Samples were used to verify the concenfration ofthe dose applied. [0350] Six male beagle dogs were selected from non-naive animals. The animals were assigned to the study based on acceptable health as determined by the attending veterinarian following a pre-study health evaluation. The pre-study health evaluation included a physical exam, serum chemistry and hematology evaluations. The animals were placed into two groups of 3 animals per group. Study animals were fasted overnight prior to dosing for Study Days 1 and 9 only, and food was returned approximately 4 hours post-dose. Fasting was not required on Study Days 2-8 (multiple dosing days).
[0351] On Study Days 1 and 9, Group 1 animals received a single dose of prepared drug via oral gavage at a target dose level of 5 mg/kg and at a dose volume of 1 mL kg. On Study Days 1 and 9, Group 2 animals received a single dose of prepared drug via oral gavage at a target dose level of 10 mg/kg and at a dose volume of 1 mL/kg. On Study Days 2-8, Group 1 and 2 animals received prepared drug 4 times daily (every 6 hours). Immediately following each dose, the gavage tube was flushed with approximately 10 mL of water prior to removal. Dosing proceeded according to protocol and without incident with the following exceptions:
Figure imgf000134_0001
[0352] Throughout dosing and sample collection, the animals were observed for any clinically relevant abnormalities and the following were observed:
Figure imgf000135_0001
[0353] For Study Days 1 and 9, whole blood samples (1 mL, Heparin anticoagulant) were collected from Groups 1 and 2 prior to dosing and at 0.083, 0.25, 0.50, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 24 hours post-dose. For Study Days 2-8, whole blood samples were collected prior to tlie first morning dose of each day for Groups 1 and 2. Whole blood samples were placed in an ice bath immediately upon collection for processing. A refrigerated centrifuge (3500 φm for ~10 minutes at 5+3 °C) was used to process whole blood to plasma.
Results
[0354] The concentration of drug in the plasma ofthe dogs on days 1 and 9 are given in the tables below, and shown graphically in figures 12 and 13.
Table 17 Drug Assayed concentrating in dog plasma (ng/ml):
Figure imgf000136_0001
** BQL - Below quantitation limit (1 ng/mL)
Figure imgf000136_0002
[0355] Further, the steady-state concenfration of drug in blood plasma immediately before given another dose of drag is given below:
Table 18: Concentration of drug in dog plasma prior to dosing:
Figure imgf000137_0001
[0356] By day 3, the plasma concentration has reached an approximate steady-state for all dogs within both dosing regimes. This data is graphed in Figure 14 (note that the zero time in figure 14, is the time immediately before the first morning dosing on the third day ofthe study. Subsequent plasma levels were taken before each morning dose on days 4-8). Fig. 14 shows the steady-state trough (Cmin) values for each ofthe six dogs.
Example 5 - Simulated Multiple Dosing Pharmacokinetics
[0357] This example describes a simulation ofthe pharmacokinetics of an ion channel modulating compound, particularly the pharmacokinetics of different multiple dosing regimes. This simulation is based on parameters extracted from experimental data defining the plasma levels of one example of an ion channel modulating compound as described herein.
[0358] The following parameters were estimated from the pharmacokinetics and bioavailability of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride in beagle dogs. A summary ofthe estimated parameters is presented in the table below:
Table 19: Estimated One-Compartment Model Parameters
Figure imgf000138_0001
* Used Tmax equal 15 instead of 30 Using Tmax = 30 causes Vd to be approximately 2 2 L/kg
One compartment model was found to adequately fit the data There were not enough data points to justify a 2 compartment fit
[0359] All parameters were fit using a one-compartment model, and were in good agreement across all four dogs. The parameters from Dog 3 were used in the remainder of this example to simulate the pharmacokinetics of (IR, 2R)-2-[(3R)-hydroxypyrrolidinyl]-l-(3,4- dimethoxyphenethoxy)cyclohexane monohydrochloride.
[0360] Using the parameters generated, the pharmacokinetics of a single oral (bolus) dose of 100 mg ofthe drug (approximately 10 mg/kg) maybe calculated. Figure 15 shows a simulation of this single oral dose. Because the data shown is simulated, the pharmacokinetic profile at any time following administration (t) may be determined. Simulation of this data was performed using known methods.
[0361] The pharmacokinetics (e.g. plasma concentrations over time) of multiple oral doses may also be simulated. Figure 16 shows the blood plasma concentration (Cp in μg/ml) for eight doses of 100 mg of drug administered every 2 hours. The steady-state trough (Cmιn) value is achieved by six hours (360 minutes). This trough value is approximately 0.92 μg/mL when the drag is given at a dose of 100 mg every 2 hours.
[0362] As described herein, dosing regimes may vary, including variations in the amount of drug given per dose, the method of dosing (formulation), and the time between doses. For example, a "loading dose" of 500 mg followed by several "maintenance" doses of 100 mg given every two hours is simulated in Figure 17. The initial peak in blood plasma concentration (Cmaχ) is followed by the saw-tooth pattern as the concentration ofthe drug achieves a trough. As before, the trough concentration (Cmm) is approximately 0.92 μg/ml. Figure 18 shows another example in which the loading dose (first dose) is 150 mg, followed by maintenance dose (subsequent doses) of 100 mg.
[0363] Drug formulation may also have dramatic effect on tlie pharmacokinetics of ion channel modulating compounds. For example, the release and continuous release formulations described above may be used to simulate plasma levels. The rate constant (dissolution rate constant) for an IR formulation, a 300 mg Hydrophilic formulation, a hydrophobic formulation, and a hot-melt wax formulation (see the Immediate Release and Controlled Release formulations section, above) were approximated by fitting measured data to a first-order dissolution model. These rate constants are shown in Table 20. As with all of the modeled parameters, approximations ofthe dissolution rate constants could be made using different methods, such as zero-order kinetics.
Table 20: First Order Dissolution Rate Constants for IR and CR Formulations
Figure imgf000139_0001
[0364] Figure 19 shows the pharmacokinetics of these formulations based on these dissolution rate constants for a single dose. A simulation of a multiple-dosing regime using a 300 mg hydrophilic CR tablet is shown in Figure 20 where maintenance doses are given every eight hours. Figure 21 shows the simulated blood plasma concentration for a loading dose of a 300 mg hydrophilic CR tablet followed by 7 doses of 100 mg every eight hours. [0365] The simulations of pharmacokinetics described above are intended only to illustrate the methods, formulations and routes of administration described and claimed herein, and are not intended to limit the methods, formulations and routes of administration to any particular theory or embodiment.

Claims

CLAIMS:
1. A method for producing in the blood plasma of a human subject a total concentration of an ion channel modulating compound having a concentration of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of an ion channel modulating compound in one or more doses of a formulation, wherein each dose of formulation comprises an ion channel modulating compound of formula
Figure imgf000140_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and rnixtures thereof, or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein I^t and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci-Cgalkoxy; and wherein the amount of ion channel modulating compound administered to the subject produces in the blood plasma ofthe subject a total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound of greater than about 0.1 μg ml for some time.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the total concentration of the ion channel modulating compound has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml.
3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the dose or doses are administered intravenously.
4. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the dose or doses are administered orally.
5. The method of claim 2, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml.
6. The method of claim 2, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cma of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml.
7. The method of claim 1 , wherein the total concentration of the ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours.
8. The method of claim 1 , wherein the total concentration of the ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours.
9. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the ion channel modulating compound is administered in two or more doses.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation, and wherein each dose of formulation comprises a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000141_0001
11. A method for producing in the blood plasma of a subject a total concentration of an ion channel modulating compound or compounds having a concentration of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of one or more ion channel modulating compounds in one or more doses of formulation, wherein each dose of formulation independently comprises one or more ion channel modulating compounds; the amount of ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to the subject produces in the blood plasma ofthe subject a total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds having a concentration of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time; and the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from a compound of formula
Figure imgf000142_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein, n=l, 2, 3, or 4; X is selected from a direct bond, -C(Rg,R14)-Y-, and -C(Rι3)=CH-, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (111) then at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is not hydrogen; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S, and C1-C4alkylene; R13 is selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl, and benzyl; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C8alkyl, C3-Csalkoxyalkyl, Cj-Cghydroxyalkyl, and C -Cι2aralkyl; or Ri and R , when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (TJ):
Figure imgf000143_0001
(H) wherein the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more of the additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Cahydroxyalkyl, oxo, C -C4acyl,
Figure imgf000143_0002
C -C4alkylcarboxy, C!-C3alkoxy, C1-C20alkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyelo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and RJ, are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (I) at the 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-C6alkyl, and Cι-C6alkoxy, and, when both R3 and 4 are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R , Rό and R14 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cϊ-Cδalkyl, aryl and benzyl, or Re and R14, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro CrCscycloalkyl; A is selected from Cs-C^alkyl, a Cs-C^carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (IIT), (IN), (V), (VI), (NH) and (VIII):
Figure imgf000144_0001
(HI) where R , R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cόalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C -C alkoxycarbonyl, CrCβthioalkyl and Ν(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cgalkyl;
Figure imgf000144_0002
(IN) (V) where R10 and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cethioalkyl, and N(Rιs,Ri6) where R15 and Rι6 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and -Chalky!;
Figure imgf000144_0003
(VI) where R12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Cτ-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, 0, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to R17 when Z is N, and Rι is selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000145_0001
(vπ) (Nm)
12. The method of claim 11, the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml.
13. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein each dose of formulation comprises one ion channel modulating compound.
14. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation.
15. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein the method comprises administering two or more doses.
16. The method of claim 12, wherem the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml.
17. The method of claim 12, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmaχ of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml.
18. The method of claim 11, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours.
19. The method of claim 11, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours.
20. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherem each dose of formulation is administered intravenously.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the formulation is an isotonic intravenous solution of the ion channel modulating compound.
22. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein the subject is human.
23. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein the subject is a domestic animal or farm animal.
24. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein the at least one dose is administered orally.
25. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein n=l, 3, or 4.
26. The method of claim 11 or 12, wherein n =2.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein R\ and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II).
28. The method of claims 27, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000147_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein, R20, R2ι and R22 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and CpCealkoxy.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000147_0002
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and rrήxtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are each a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000148_0001
31. A method for producing in the blood plasma of a human subject a total concentration of an ion channel modulating compound with a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of an ion channel modulating compound in one or more doses of a formulation, wherein each dose of formulation comprises an ion channel modulating compound of formula
Figure imgf000148_0002
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and - alkoxy; and wherein the amount of ion channel modulating compound administered to the subject produces in the blood plasma ofthe subject a total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound with a mean trough concentration less than about 20 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the dose or doses are administered intravenously.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the dose or doses are administered orally.
34. The method of claim 31, wherem the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml.
35. The method of claim 31, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 1 μg/ml.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the total concenfration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml.
37. The method of claim 31, wherein the ion channel modulating compound is administered in two or more doses.
38. The method of claim 31, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation, and wherein each dose of formulation comprises a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000149_0001
39. A method for producing in the blood plasma of a subject a total concentration of an ion channel modulating compound or compounds with a mean trough concentration less than about 20 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of one or more ion channel modulating compounds in one or more doses of formulation, wherein each dose of formulation independently comprises one or more ion channel modulating compounds; the amount of ion channel modulating compound or compounds administered to the subject produces in the blood plasma ofthe subject a total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds with a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml and or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; and the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from a compound of formula
Figure imgf000150_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and rnixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein, n=l, 2, 3, or 4; X is selected from a direct bond, -C(R6,R14)-Y-, and -C(Rι3)=CH-, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (III) then at least one of R7, R8 and R9 is not hydrogen; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S, and C1-C4alkylene; R13 is selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl, and benzyl; Rt and R are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C8alkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-C1 aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II):
Figure imgf000150_0002
(11) wherein the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more of the additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, Cι-C3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, C C3alkoxy, C1-C20alkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cealkyl, C2-C4acyl, C -C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0)hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and R4 are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (I) at the 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, and Cι-C6alkoxy, and, when both R3 and R} are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R5, Re and Rι4 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, aryl and benzyl, or Re and R1 , when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C3-C5cycloalkyl; A is selected from C5-C12alkyl, a C3-C13carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (III), (IN), (V), (VI), (NH) and (VET):
Figure imgf000152_0001
(III) where R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cδalkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβtfύoalkyl and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and -Cδalkyl;
Figure imgf000152_0002
(IV) (V) where R10 and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Ci-Cealkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cθthioalkyl, and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl;
Figure imgf000152_0003
(NI) where R12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl, and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to R17 when Z is N, and R17 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000153_0001
(VII) (vm)
40. The method of claim 39, wherein each dose of formulation comprises one ion channel modulating compound.
41. The method of claim 39, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation.
42. The method of claim 39, wherein the method comprises administering two or more doses.
43. The method of claim 39, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concenfration of less than about 10 μg/ml.
44. The method of claim 39, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 μg/ml.
45. The method of claim 44, wherein the total concenfration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml.
46. The method of claim 39, wherein each dose of formulation is administered intravenously.
47. The method of claim 46, wherein the formulation is an isotonic intravenous solution of the ion channel modulating compound.
48. The method of claim 39, wherein the subject is human.
49. The method of claim 39, wherein the subject is a domestic animal or farm animal.
50. The method of claim 39, wherein the at least one dose is administered orally.
51. The method of claim 39, wherein n=l, 3, or 4.
52. The method of claim 39, wherein n =2.
53. The method of claim 52, wherein Ri and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-Ci2aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II).
54. The method of claims 53, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000154_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein, R20, R21 and 22 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Cι-C6alkoxy.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000155_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
56. The method of claim 55, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are each a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000155_0002
57. A method for treating a human subject undergoing atrial fibrillation, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of an ion channel modulating compound in one or more infravenous doses of a formulation, wherein each dose of formulation comprises an ion channel modulating compound of formula
Figure imgf000155_0003
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein R4 and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Cι-C alkoxy; and wherein the amount of ion channel modulating compound administered to the subject produces in the blood plasma ofthe subject a total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound with a concentration of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for some time.
58. The method of claim 57 wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml.
59. The method of claim 58, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmaχ of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml.
60. The method of claim 58, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml.
61. The method of claim 57, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours.
62. The method of claim 57, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours.
63. The method of claim 57 or 58, wherein the ion channel modulating compound is administered in two or more doses.
64. The method of claim 57 or 58, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation, and wherein each dose of formulation comprises a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000157_0001
65. A method for treating a subject undergoing arrhythmia, the method comprising administering to the subject an amount of one or more ion channel modulating compounds in one or more doses of formulation, wherein each dose of formulation independently comprises one or more ion channel modulating compounds; the total concenfration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a concentration of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for at least some time; and the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from a compound of formula
Figure imgf000157_0002
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein, n=l, 2, 3, or 4; X is selected from a direct bond, -C( 6, u)-Y-, and -C(R13)=CH-, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (III) then at least one of R7, Rs and R is not hydrogen; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S, and Cι-C4alkylene; R13 is selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl, and benzyl; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Cι-C8alkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C7-C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II):
Figure imgf000158_0001
(II) wherein the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more of the additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C3hydroxyalkyl, oxo,
C2-C4acyl, Ci-Csalkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, CrC3alkoxy, C1-C20alkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Cι-C6alkyl, C2-C4acyl,
C2-C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3-azabicyclo[3.2.2]nonan-3-yl, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and R4 are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (I) at the 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Cι-C6aιkyl, and Ci-C6alkoxy, and, when both R3 and R are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R5, R6 and Rj are independently selected from hydrogen, -Cβalkyl, aryl and benzyl, or Re and R1 , when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C3-C5cycloalkyl; A is selected from Cs-C^alkyl, a C3-C13carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (III), (IN), (N), (VI), (Nil) and (NIII):
Figure imgf000159_0001
(HI) where R7, R8 and R are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7aιkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, -Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, C oalkyl and Ν(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and
Figure imgf000159_0002
Figure imgf000159_0003
(IN) (V) where R10 and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C6alkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cealkyl;
Figure imgf000160_0001
(VI) where R12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-Cβthioalkyl, and N(Ri5,R16) where Rι5 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cι-C6alkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, O, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to R1 when Z is N, and R17 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000160_0002
(VII) (VIII)
66. The method of claim 65, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound has a Cmax of greater than about 0.1 μg/ml.
67. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein each dose of formulation comprises one ion channel modulating compound.
68. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation.
69. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the method comprises administering two or more doses.
70. The method of claim 66, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmaχ of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 20 μg/ml.
71. The method of claim 66, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a Cmax of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 15 μg/ml.
72. The method of claim 65, wherein the total concenfration of the ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 0.1 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 10 hours.
73. The method of claim 65, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject is greater than about 1.0 μg/ml for a period of time of at least about 2 hours.
74. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein each dose of formulation is administered intravenously.
75. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the formulation is an isotonic intravenous solution ofthe ion channel modulating compound.
76. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the subject is human.
77. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the subject is a domestic animal or farm animal.
78. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein the arrhythmia is an atrial archythmia.
79. The method of claim 78, wherein the anhythmia is an atrial fibrillation.
80. The method of claim 65 or 66 wherein the arrhythmia is selected from the group comprising: ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, premature ventricular contractions, supraventricular tachycardia, Wolff-Parkinson- White Syndrome, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, premature supravenfricular contractions, heart block, Long Q-T Syndrome, and sick sinus syndrome.
81. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein n=l, 3, or 4.
82. The method of claim 65 or 66, wherein n =2.
83. The method of claim 82, wherein R\ and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyaιkyl, and C7-C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II).
84. The method of claims 83, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000162_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein, R20, R21 and R22 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Cι-C6alkoxy.
85. The method of claim 84, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000163_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
86. The method of claim 85, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are each a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000163_0002
87. A method for preventing or postponing onset of atrial fibrillation in a human subject, the method comprising administering to the subject one or more doses of a formulation, wherein each dose of formulation comprises an ion channel modulating compound of formula
Figure imgf000163_0003
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or a solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein i^ and R5 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Cι-C6alkoxy; and wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml.
88. The method of claim 87, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml.
89. The method of claim 87, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml, and/or a steady state concenfration between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml.
90. The method of claim 87, wherein the ion channel modulating compound is administered in two or more doses.
91. The method of claim 87, wherein the doses are administered orally.
92. The method of claim 87, wherein the dose or doses are administered intravenously.
93. The method of claim 87, wherein each dose of formulation comprises a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000164_0001
94. A method for preventing or postponing onset of arehythrnia in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject one or more doses of a formulation, wherein each dose of formulation independently comprises one or more ion channel modulating compounds; the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound or compounds in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 20 μg/ml; and the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from a compound of formula
Figure imgf000165_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein, n=l, 2, 3, or 4; X is selected from a direct bond, -C(R6,R14)-Y-, and -C(Rι3)=CH-, with the proviso that when X is a direct bond and A is formula (III) then at least one of R7, R8 and R is not hydrogen; Y is selected from a direct bond, O, S, and Cι-C alkylene; R13 is selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, C3-C8cycloalkyl, aryl, and benzyl; Ri and R2 are independently selected from hydrogen, Ci-Csalkyl, C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, d-Cshydroxyalkyl, and C7-C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II):
Figure imgf000165_0002
(ii) wherein the ring of formula (II) is formed from the nitrogen as shown as well as three to nine additional ring atoms independently selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur; where any two adjacent ring atoms may be joined together by single or double bonds, and where any one or more ofthe additional carbon ring atoms may be substituted with one or two substituents selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Cshydroxyalkyl, oxo, C2-C4acyl, CrC3alkyl, C2-C4alkylcarboxy, CrC3alkoxy, C\- C20alkanoyloxy, or may be substituted to form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; and any two adjacent additional carbon ring atoms may be fused to a C3-C8carbocyclic ring, and any one or more ofthe additional nitrogen ring atoms may be substituted with substituents selected from hydrogen, Ci-Cδalkyl, C2-C4acyl, C2-C4hydroxyalkyl and C3-C8alkoxyalkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), may form a bicyclic ring system selected from 3 -azabicyclo [3.2.2]nonan-3 -yl, 2-azabicyclo [2.2.2]octan-2-yl, 3 -azabicyclo [3.1.0]- hexan-3-yl, and 3-azabicyclo[3.2.0]heptan-3-yl; R3 and R4 are independently attached to the cyclohexane ring shown in formula (I) at the 3-, 4-, 5- or 6- positions and are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, Ci-Cόalkyl, and Cι-C6alkoxy, and, when both R3 and R4 are attached to the same cyclohexane ring atom, may together form a spiro five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or two heteroatoms selected from oxygen and sulfur; R5, Rό and R14 are independently selected from hydrogen, C Cealkyl, aryl and benzyl, or R and R14, when taken together with the carbon to which they are attached, may form a spiro C3-C5cycloalkyl; A is selected from C5-C12alkyl, a C3-C13carbocyclic ring, and ring systems selected from formulae (III), (IN), (V), (NI), (Nil) and (VIII):
Figure imgf000167_0001
(III) where R7, R8 and R9 are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-C6alkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, CrCδfhioalkyl and N(R15,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Cj-Cβalkyl;
Figure imgf000167_0002
(IN) (N) where R10 and Rπ are independently selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cβalkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Cι-C6thioalkyl, and Ν(Ri5,Rι6) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-Cδalkyl;
Figure imgf000167_0003
(VI) where R12 is selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, carboxy, hydrogen, hydroxy, hydroxymethyl, methanesulfonamido, nitro, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, C2-C7alkanoyloxy, Cι-C alkyl, Cι-C6alkoxy, C2-C7alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C6tbioalkyl, and N(Ri5,R16) where R15 and R16 are independently selected from hydrogen, acetyl, methanesulfonyl, and Ci-C6alkyl; and Z is selected from CH, CH2, 0, N and S, where Z may be directly bonded to "X" as shown in formula (I) when Z is CH or N, or Z may be directly bonded to Rπ when Z is N, and Rπ is selected from hydrogen, Ci-CβalkyL C -C8cycloalkyl, aryl and benzyl;
Figure imgf000168_0001
(VE) (Nm)
95. The method of claim 94, wherein each dose of formulation comprises one ion channel modulating compound.
96. The method of claim 94, wherein the method comprises administering to the subject one or two doses ofthe formulation.
97. The method of claim 94, wherein the method comprises administering two or more doses.
98. The method of claim 94, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of about 10 μg/ml and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 10 μg/ml.
99. The method of claim 94, wherein the total concentration ofthe ion channel modulating compound in the blood plasma ofthe subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml, and/or a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 μg/ml and about 3 μg/ml.
100. The method of claim 94, wherein each dose of formulation is administered orally.
101. The method of claim 100, wherein the formulation is a solid or liquid dosage form of the ion channel modulating compound.
102. The method of claim 94, wherein the arrhythmia is an afrial arehythmia.
103. The method of claim 102, wherein the arrhythmia is an atrial fibrillation.
104. The method of claim 94, wherein the arrhythmia is selected from the group comprising: ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, premature ventricular contractions, supraventricular tachycardia, Wolff-Parkinson- White Syndrome, atrial fibrillation, afrial flutter, premature supraventricular confractions, heart block, Long Q-T Syndrome, and sick sinus syndrome.
105. The method of claim 94, wherein the subject is a human.
106. The method of claim 94, wherein the subject is a domestic animal or farm animal.
107. The method of claim 94, wherein n=l, 3, or 4.
108. The method of claim 94, wherein n=2.
109. The method of claim 108, wherem Ri and R2 are independently selected from C3-C8alkoxyalkyl, Cι-C8hydroxyalkyl, and C -C12aralkyl; or Ri and R2, when taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are directly attached in formula (I), form a ring denoted by formula (II).
110. The method of claims 109, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000170_0001
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geomefric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein, R20, R21 and R22 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and Ci- alkoxy.
111. The method of claim 110, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are independently selected from compounds of formula
Figure imgf000170_0002
including isolated enantiomeric, diastereomeric and geometric isomers thereof and mixtures thereof, or solvates or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
112. The method of claim 111, wherein the one or more ion channel modulating compounds are each a monohydrochloride salt ofthe formula
Figure imgf000171_0001
PCT/US2004/013731 2003-05-02 2004-05-03 Uses of ion channel modulating compounds WO2004098525A2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002524034A CA2524034A1 (en) 2003-05-02 2004-05-03 Uses of ion channel modulating compounds
US11/832,580 US20080063707A1 (en) 2003-05-02 2007-08-01 Controlled release tablet formulations for the prevention of arrhythmias

Applications Claiming Priority (18)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US46715903P 2003-05-02 2003-05-02
US60/467,159 2003-05-02
US49339203P 2003-08-07 2003-08-07
US60/493,392 2003-08-07
US51624803P 2003-10-31 2003-10-31
US51648603P 2003-10-31 2003-10-31
US60/516,248 2003-10-31
US60/516,486 2003-10-31
US52691103P 2003-12-03 2003-12-03
US60/526,911 2003-12-03
US52716903P 2003-12-04 2003-12-04
US60/527,169 2003-12-04
US52825103P 2003-12-08 2003-12-08
US60/528,251 2003-12-08
US54494104P 2004-02-13 2004-02-13
US60/544,941 2004-02-13
US55940504P 2004-04-01 2004-04-01
US60/559,405 2004-04-01

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/832,580 Continuation-In-Part US20080063707A1 (en) 2003-05-02 2007-08-01 Controlled release tablet formulations for the prevention of arrhythmias

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004098525A2 WO2004098525A2 (en) 2004-11-18
WO2004098525A9 true WO2004098525A9 (en) 2005-01-20
WO2004098525A3 WO2004098525A3 (en) 2005-04-14

Family

ID=33437324

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/013731 WO2004098525A2 (en) 2003-05-02 2004-05-03 Uses of ion channel modulating compounds

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CA (1) CA2524034A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004098525A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2252933C2 (en) 1998-04-01 2005-05-27 Кардиом Фарма Корп. Aminocyclohexanol ethers, composition having antiarrhythmic activity and uses thereof
US7507545B2 (en) 1999-03-31 2009-03-24 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Ion channel modulating activity method
US7524879B2 (en) 2000-10-06 2009-04-28 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof
US7057053B2 (en) 2000-10-06 2006-06-06 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof
BRPI0318278B8 (en) 2003-05-02 2024-01-09 Cardiome Pharma Corp Aminocyclohexyl ether compounds, composition comprising said compounds, uses thereof and method for modulating ion channel activity in an in vitro environment
US7345086B2 (en) 2003-05-02 2008-03-18 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Uses of ion channel modulating compounds
WO2005018635A2 (en) 2003-08-07 2005-03-03 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Ion channel modulating activity i
US7345087B2 (en) 2003-10-31 2008-03-18 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Aminocyclohexyl ether compounds and uses thereof
JP4954864B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2012-06-20 カーディオム ファーマ コーポレイション Prodrugs of ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof
EP1729815A2 (en) 2004-04-01 2006-12-13 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Pegylated ion channel modulating compounds
WO2005097087A2 (en) 2004-04-01 2005-10-20 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Merged ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof
US7569589B2 (en) 2004-07-29 2009-08-04 Merck & Co., Inc. Potassium channel inhibitors
MX2007005496A (en) 2004-11-08 2007-07-09 Cardiome Pharma Corp A new dosing regimen for ion channel modulating compounds for treating acute atrial fibrillation in a human.
EP1828099B1 (en) * 2004-11-18 2020-01-22 Correvio International Sàrl Synthetic process for aminocyclohexyl ether compounds
JP5159616B2 (en) 2005-06-15 2013-03-06 カーディオム ファーマ コーポレイション Synthetic process for the preparation of aminocyclohexyl ether compounds
WO2008137778A2 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Controlled release oral formulations of ion channel modulating compounds and related methods for preventing arrhythmia
WO2009018547A1 (en) * 2007-08-01 2009-02-05 Cardiome Pharma Corp. Extended release formulations containing an ion-channel-modulating compound for the prevention of arrhythmias

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2268590A1 (en) * 1999-04-12 2000-10-12 Nortran Pharmaceuticals Inc. Ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2524034A1 (en) 2004-11-18
WO2004098525A3 (en) 2005-04-14
WO2004098525A2 (en) 2004-11-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7820712B2 (en) Uses of ion channel modulating compounds
EP1087934B1 (en) Aminocyclohexyl ether compounds and uses thereof
US7687536B2 (en) Aminocycloalkyl cinnamide compounds for arrhythmia and as analgesics and anesthetics
WO2004098525A9 (en) Uses of ion channel modulating compounds
US7674820B2 (en) Ion channel modulating activity I
US20090270478A1 (en) Ion channel modulating activity ii
US8008342B2 (en) Ion channel modulating compounds and uses thereof
US20090041841A1 (en) Controlled release tablet formulations for the prevention of arrhythmias
KR100352898B1 (en) Pharmaceuticals containing novel 3-benzoyl-3,7-diazabicyclo [3,3,1] nonan-compounds
EP1868598B1 (en) A new dosing regimen for ion channel modulating compounds for treating acute atrial fibrillation in a human
MXPA05011808A (en) Uses of ion channel modulating compounds
AU2004260624A1 (en) Use of 3,7-diazabicyclo`3, 3,1 !nonane compounds for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of anti-arrhythmic events in male human patients
EA028995B1 (en) Tesofensine and optically active acetylamino acid salts, use thereof in the treatment and/or prevention of disorders related to obesity
JP2002255819A (en) Neurotrophic factor-like agent
US20120095073A1 (en) Ion channel modulating activity ii
JP2003026569A (en) Remedy for liver disease

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGE 1, DESCRIPTION, REPLACED BY CORRECT PAGE 1

DPEN Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2524034

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2005/011808

Country of ref document: MX

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11832580

Country of ref document: US

DPE2 Request for preliminary examination filed before expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)